JP6786156B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

Conventionally, it is detected that a plurality of reels in which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, a game medal, a coin, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "game medium") are inserted, and the start lever is operated by the player. Detects that the start switch that requests the start of rotation of a plurality of reels and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels have been pressed by the player, and requests that the rotation of the corresponding reel be stopped. A stop switch that outputs a signal, a stepping motor that is provided corresponding to each of a plurality of reels and transmits each driving force to each reel, and a stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch. It is equipped with a reel control unit that controls the operation of each reel and rotates and stops each reel, and when it detects that the start lever has been operated, a lottery is performed based on a random number value, and the result of this lottery (hereinafter, "" There is known a so-called pachislot game machine that stops the rotation of the reel based on the timing when the stop button is detected and the "internal winning combination").

Patent Document 1 proposes a game machine of this type that promotes the operation of the effect button by lighting an LED provided on the effect button. Further, Patent Document 2 proposes an image for displaying an image for measuring the operation timing of the effect button on a liquid crystal display device.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-146523 JP-A-2010-17972

In the conventional game machine as described above, although the operation of the effect button is urged, the effect button is operated when the effect button is not operated and an operation effective for the progress of the game is performed. There was a problem that the production was not executed and the player's interest could not be improved by the production.

The present invention has been made to solve such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving a player's interest by directing.

The game machine according to the present invention has a display means (display unit 100) for displaying a production image, a production operation means (chance button 33) used for the production, and a production determination that determines the production according to the progress of the game. The display means displays the means (sub CPU 102), the effect executing means (sub CPU 102) for executing the effect determined by the effect determining means, and the image corresponding to the effect determined by the effect determining means. The display means (sub CPU 102) and the effect operation detection means (chance switch 35) for detecting the operation of the effect operation means are provided, and the effect image display means is triggered by the operation of the effect operation means. When the effect is determined by the effect determining means, an image prompting the operation of the effect operating means is displayed on the display means, and the operation of the effect operating means is detected by the effect detecting means, or the operation of the effect operating means is detected. When a predetermined execution condition different from the operation of the staging operation means is satisfied, the display of the image prompting the operation of the staging operation means by the display means is terminated, and the staging execution means operates the staging operation means. When the predetermined execution condition is satisfied while the effect triggered by the effect is determined by the effect determining means, the effect triggered by the operation of the effect operating means is executed, and the effect operating means The effects triggered by the operation are the first effect indicating that the first privilege (additional number of ART games) is given in the predetermined game state (ART), and the game state different from the predetermined game state. It has a configuration including (normal) or a second effect indicating that a second privilege (winning of the bonus) different from the first privilege is given in the predetermined gaming state .

With this configuration, when the gaming machine according to the present invention executes an effect triggered by the operation of the effect operation means, even if the effect operation means is not operated, if a predetermined execution condition is satisfied. , Since the production triggered by the operation of the production operation means is executed, the player's interest can be improved by the production.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player by directing.

It is a figure which shows the functional flow of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is an overall perspective view which shows the external structure of the pachislot machine. It is an overall front view which shows the external structure of the pachislot machine. It is a front view which shows a part of the external structure with the protective cover of the pachislot machine removed. It is a schematic layout drawing inside the housing of the pachislot machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the said pachislot machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the said pachislot machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship between a projector mechanism and a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mounting state of a mirror mechanism. It is a vertical sectional view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of the front screen mechanism. It is a perspective view of the front screen mechanism. It is a front view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the opening for operation. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to the fixed screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to the front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to the rear screen mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of the front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which removed the right side plate of the screen housing. It is a perspective view of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operating state of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation process of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation process of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation process of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is a figure which shows a part of the display screen displayed on the image display device of the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the other part of the display screen displayed on the image display device of the pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the main control board of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the auxiliary control board of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state of the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state regarding the presence / absence of notification of the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can stop and display. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can stop and display. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can stop and display. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can stop and display. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can stop and display. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can stop and display. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the abbreviation of the winning role in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the sub-flag conversion table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the general game state in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal medium-high probability lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the CZ lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the mode-up lottery table in CZ1 stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the point-up lottery table in CZ2 stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in CZ stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in CZ stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in a normal ART in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in ART stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART level determination table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal ART medium and high probability lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the CT lottery table in ART stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table in a normal ART stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in CT in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the lottery table during CT stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in CT stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table in CT stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the lottery table which adds the number of sets in CT stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the bonus in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the bonus type lottery table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the lottery table which added the number of ART games in the bonus stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the CT lottery table at the end of a bonus stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the exceptional game in the general game state in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table during non-ART stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the notification performed on the main side and the notification performed on the sub side in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the accessory data table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main control processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the control process according to the state of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flag conversion process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the normal middle start processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the start in CZ of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ1 (CZ2) middle processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ1 (CZ2) middle processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ3 middle processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the start of a normal ART of the pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the start of CT of the pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the start of BB of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop initial setting process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop control processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the BB check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the RT check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the RT check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ / ART end processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory control task of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory operation sequence registration process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory control processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the movable screen position determination processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main task of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the chance button processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the error display processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the navigation position designation process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the LED control task of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the LED data registration process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the production content determination process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the start command of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-side navigation control processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the game record processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the display screen of the image display device of the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the error image for F screen displayed on the display unit of the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the error image for R screen displayed on the display unit of the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the error image for a W screen displayed on the display unit of the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the error image displayed on the image display device of the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st navigation image displayed on the display unit of the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd navigation image displayed on the display unit of the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the CT precursor in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the actually displayed symbol combination in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the actually displayed symbol combination in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in normal ART stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table in ART which is stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game during CT in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in CT stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the CT meter promotion lottery table in CT stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table in CT which is stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in CZ in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the CZ2 end lottery table stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the lock lottery table stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the CT precursor in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the content of the notification during the MB flag in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of the correspondence relationship between the notification performed on the main side and the notification performed on the sub side in a pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the lock state and notification in a pachislot machine of a modification.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine showing an embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to medals, coins, game balls, point data for games, tokens, and the like can also be applied as the game medium. Further, in the present embodiment, the replay probability is higher than the normal time between the assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT"), which is a function of navigating the establishment of a specific small winning combination with a lamp, and the specific number of plays. A pachislot machine having an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as "ART") function in which the RT function is operated at the same time will be described.

[Functional flow of pachislot machines]
As shown in FIG. 1, when a medal is inserted by a player and the start lever 6 is operated, the pachi-slot machine 1 has one value (for example, 0 to 65535) from a random number in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535). Hereafter, a random number value) is extracted.

The internal winning combination determining means (the internal lottery process of FIG. 80 executed by the main CPU 93 described later) performs lottery based on the extracted random number values and determines the internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination determining means detects the start operation of the unit game with respect to the start lever 6 by the start switch 64 (see FIG. 32) constituting the start operation detecting means for detecting the start operation of the game (establishment of a predetermined start condition). ), The internal winning combination is determined with a predetermined winning probability from a plurality of winning combinations.

By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed along the winning line described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to "winning" in which benefits such as medal payout, replay operation, and bonus operation are given to the player, and other so-called "losses". Such things are provided.

Subsequently, after the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotated, when the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R are pressed by the player, the reel stop control means (main CPU 93, stepping motors 51L, 51C described later). , 51R) controls to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, and 3R based on the internal winning combination and the timing at which the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R are pressed.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R within a specified time (190 ms) from the time when the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R are pressed. .. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R within the specified time is called the "number of sliding pieces", and the maximum number thereof is equivalent to four symbols (maximum number of sliding pieces). ).

When the internal winning combination that allows the display of the combination of symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means uses the above-mentioned specified time to set the combination of the symbols to the winning line (hereinafter, "effective line"). The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces so as to be displayed as much as possible.

On the other hand, for combinations of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination, the reels are used within the maximum number of sliding pieces so that they will not be displayed along the effective line using the above specified time. Stop the rotation of 3L, 3C and 3R.

In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped, the winning determination means (main CPU 93 described later) determines whether the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line is related to the winning. Judge whether or not.

That is, the winning determination means determines the winning or non-winning of the winning combination based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the effective line based on the fact that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means.

When it is determined that the prize is related to a prize, the player is given a privilege such as paying out a medal. The series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game) in the pachislot machine 1.

In the present embodiment, the reel stop operation (operation of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that is first performed when all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotating is the first stop operation and the first stop operation. The stop operation performed after the stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the stop operation performed after the second stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in the series of flows described above, various effects can be produced by using the light (video) output performed by the display unit 100, the sound output performed by the speakers 9L and 9R, or a combination thereof. Will be done.

When the start lever is operated, a random value for effect (hereinafter, random value for effect) is extracted in addition to the random value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the effect random value is extracted, the effect content determining means determines by lottery what to execute this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. The sub-control board, which will be described later, is responsible for determining the content of the effect.

When the content of the effect is determined, the display unit 100 and the speakers 9L and 9R execute the corresponding effect in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the reel starts rotating, when the rotation of each reel stops, and when it is judged whether or not there is a prize. To do. In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, by executing the production content associated with the internal winning combination, the game has an opportunity to know or anticipate the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at). It is provided to the player and can improve the interest of the player.

[Structure of pachislot machine]
This concludes the description of the functional flow of the pachislot machine 1. Next, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4.

FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

The housing 60 forming the entire pachi-slot machine 1 includes a box-shaped cabinet 61 having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door 62a arranged on the upper front surface of the cabinet 61, and a lower front surface of the cabinet 61. It has a lower door 62b arranged in.

The cabinet 61 is composed of an upper cabinet 61a and a lower cabinet 61b separated from the upper cabinet 61a by an intermediate support plate 301, and accommodates equipment used for games (for example, a hopper device).

The upper door 62a and the lower door 62b are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the openings of the upper cabinet 61a and the lower cabinet 61b, respectively. The upper door 62a is provided so as to be able to close the opening of the upper cabinet 61a, and the lower door 62b is provided so as to be able to close the opening of the lower cabinet 61b.

A display unit 100 is provided inside the upper part 61a of the cabinet. The display unit 100 is an effect device that produces an effect according to the progress of the game, and constitutes a display means for displaying various images according to the progress of the game under the control of the sub-control board 72 described later. The display unit 100 may be a display device such as a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, but in the present embodiment, a so-called projection mapping device is used as described later.

A protective cover 20 is provided on the front surface of the display unit 100 of the upper part 61a of the cabinet so that the image displayed on the display unit 100 can be visually recognized. The protective cover 20 has a light-shielding property against light incident from the outside to the inside, and suppresses deterioration of visibility of various images displayed on the display unit 100 due to external light. The protective cover 20 in the present embodiment is composed of members having a transmittance of about 50% to 80%.

A display window 4 formed as a rectangular opening is provided in a substantially central portion of the upper portion of the lower door 62b. The display window 4 constitutes a symbol display means for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, which will be described later. In the display window 4, a cross-up line diagonally to the upper right, a top line in the upper row, a center line in the middle row, a bottom line in the lower row, and a cross-down line diagonally downward to the right are displayed. A reel unit (not shown) constituting the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is detachably attached to the back side of the display window 4.

As shown in FIG. 4, panels 21a and 21b are provided inside the protective cover 20 of the upper door 62a so as to hide the outside of the left and right display areas of the display unit 100. A translucent region is formed on the panels 21a and 21b. In this area, decorative portions 22a and 22b, which are decorated with a pattern representing a gaming state, are arranged, respectively.

The decorative portions 22a and 22b in the present embodiment are formed by a pattern representing a gaming state applied to the panels 21a and 21b. The decorative portions 22a and 22b are provided with decorative LEDs 23a and 23b (see FIG. 32) as light sources for irradiating light from the back surface side, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 3, the display window 4 displays three symbols out of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Therefore, the display window 4 displays a 3 × 3 pattern. The five lines from the cross-up line to the cross-down line displayed on the display window 4 are lines that linearly connect the 3 × 3 symbols displayed on the display window 4.

In the present embodiment, the center line out of these five lines is the effective line, and the winning determination is made based on the combination of the symbols displayed along the center line. On the other hand, the four lines other than the center line are pseudo lines that are not used for determining the winning.

The effective line (center line) is activated by operating the MAX bet button 11 described later or by inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 22. Here, operating the MAX bet button 11 is synonymous with inserting a medal. Therefore, for example, the term "number of inserted medals" includes both the number of BETs inserted by operating the MAX bet button 11 and the number of inserted medals actually inserted into the medal insertion slot 22.

A plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotatably provided in a horizontal row in the cabinet 61. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has a reel band on which a sequence of symbols as identification information composed of a plurality of types of symbols necessary for the game is drawn on the outer peripheral surface thereof. That is, a plurality of symbols are displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

The design drawn on each reel band can be visually recognized from the outside of the pachislot machine 1 through the display window 4. Further, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R rotates at a constant speed (for example, 80 rotations / minute).
Rotate with to display the symbol sequence in a variable manner.

A pedestal portion 10 having a substantially horizontal plane is formed below the display window 4. A medal insertion slot 22 is provided on the right side of the horizontal plane of the pedestal portion 10, and a MAX bet button 11 and a 1-bet button (not shown) are provided on the left side. Inside the MAX bet button 11, an LED (not shown) that lights up when a medal can be inserted is provided.

By pressing the MAX bet button 11, the number of medals (3 medals) used for the unit game (one game) is inserted, and the effective line is activated. On the other hand, one medal is inserted each time the 1-bet button is pressed once. When the 1-bet button is operated three times, three medals used for the unit game are inserted and the effective line is activated.

The operation of the MAX bet button 11, the operation of the 1-bet button, and the operation of inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 22 (operations of inserting medals to perform a game) are referred to as "insertion operations".

In the horizontal plane of the pedestal portion 10, a chance button 33 is provided as an effect operation means used for the effect. The effect operation means is not limited to a button such as the chance button 33, and may be configured by another mechanism such as a lever or a MAX bet button 11.

The chance button 33 is provided with a chance button LED 34 (see FIG. 32) as an effect operation light source. The chance button LED 34 in the present embodiment is provided so as to illuminate the chance button 33 from the inside so that the chance button 33 appears to be lit when lit.

An information display 14 is provided at substantially the center of the pedestal portion 10 in the horizontal plane. The information display 14 is provided with an LED (not shown) that lights up according to the number of medals inserted in this game (hereinafter referred to as the number of inserted medals). In addition, information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter, the number of medals to be paid out) and the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter, the number of credits) is displayed on the information display 14. There is a digital display (not shown) that digitally displays the information to the player.

Further, the information display 14 is provided with an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying information on the stop operation required to display the combination of symbols according to the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination along the effective line. It is provided. The instruction monitor is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and notifies the player of necessary stop operation information by lighting or blinking in a manner uniquely corresponding to the stop operation information to be notified. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, a "pushing order combination" is provided, which is a combination in which the combinations of symbols displayed are different according to the order of the stop operations (pushing order). The mode that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified is, for example, to display "1" when notifying the push order "1st (performing the first stop operation on the left reel 3L)". , "2nd" is displayed when notifying the push order "2nd (performing the first stop operation on the reel 3C in the middle)", and the push order "3rd (the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R)" is displayed. To do) ”is displayed as“ 3 ”. The details of the notification of the stop operation information on the instruction monitor will be described later in FIG. 78.

As shown in FIG. 32, which will be described later, the information display 14 is controlled by the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 54. Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in addition to the instruction monitor controlled by the main control board 71, other means controlled by the sub-control board 72 may be used to notify the information of the stop operation, for example. The display unit 100 described above may notify the information of the stop operation.

In this case, the mode of notification in the instruction monitor and the mode of notification in other means may be different. That is, the instruction monitor may be notified in a manner uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified, and it is not always necessary to directly notify the information of the stop operation (for example, "1" in the instruction monitor. Even if it is displayed, it may not be possible to specify the content of the notification depending on the player, so it cannot be said to be a direct notification). On the other hand, in the notification by other means, the information of the stop operation may be directly notified. For example, when the push order "1st" is notified, the instruction monitor displays "1" which is uniquely corresponding to the push order to be notified, while the other means (display unit 100) displays the first stop operation on the left. It may be possible to directly notify what is to be done to the reel 3L of the above.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to notify the information of the necessary stop operation according to the internal winning combination not only by the control of the sub control board 72 but also by the control of the main control board 71. .. Of course, the notification of the stop operation information may be controlled according to the gaming state. More specifically, the stop operation information may be notified in the ART game state (see FIG. 36) described later without notifying the stop operation information in the general gaming state (non-ART) described later.

Further, on the left side of the front surface portion of the pedestal portion 10, a settlement button 13 for switching the credit / payout of medals acquired by the player in the game by a push button operation is provided. By switching the settlement button 13, medals are paid out from the medal payout outlet 15 at the lower part of the front surface, and the paid out medals are stored in the medal receiving portion 16.

On the right side of the settlement button 13, a start lever 6 is specified as a start operation means for rotating the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R by a player's tilt operation to start variable display of a symbol in the display window 4. It is mounted so that it can be tilted within the angle range of.

Stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R are provided at substantially the center of the front surface of the pedestal portion 10 as stop operation means for stopping the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R by pressing the player. ing. In the embodiment, one game (unit game) is basically started by operating the start lever 6 and ends when all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped.

A touch panel unit 201 is provided in front of the upper part of the lower door 62b. The touch panel unit 201 has an image display device 201a including a liquid crystal display, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, and the like, and displays various information. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the touch panel unit 201 is located on the left side of the front surface of the lower door 62b, which stands substantially perpendicular to the horizontal plane of the pedestal portion 10 (MAX bet button 11 and start lever 6 side). It is provided in.

The touch panel unit 201 has a touch sensor 201b that is superimposed on the image display device 201a and constitutes a contact input device capable of inputting contact, and a user interface image or the like corresponding to a player's operation received via the touch sensor 201b. The display of is switchable. The touch sensor 201b operates according to a predetermined operating principle such as a capacitance method, and when it receives an operation of a player, it outputs a signal corresponding to the operation as touch input information. The touch panel unit 201 is controlled by the sub-control board 72 (see FIG. 32) based on the touch input information output from the touch sensor 201b.

Speakers 9L and 9R for producing sounds such as sound effects and voices are provided on the left and right in front of the lower part of the lower door 62b, and a medal payout outlet 15 for paying medals is provided between the speakers 9L and 9R. ing. At the bottom of the lower door 62b, a medal receiving portion 16 for storing the paid medals is provided.

In addition, on the front surface of the lower part of the lower door 62b, which is sandwiched between the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R and the medal receiving portion 16, a waist panel 25 with a design corresponding to the motif of the model is placed. It is attached. The lumbar panel 25 is illuminated by a lumbar panel illuminator (not shown) provided behind it.

[Display unit structure]
Subsequently, the structure of the display unit 100 included in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 29.

(Display unit 100)
As shown in FIG. 5, a display unit 100 is provided inside the upper cabinet 61a. As shown in FIG. 6, the display unit 100 is detachably provided on the intermediate support plate 301 in the cabinet 61. The intermediate support plate 301 functions as a partition wall between the upper space and the lower space in the cabinet 61. The display unit 100 is a so-called projection mapping device having an irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light including an image and a screen device C that causes an image to appear when the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is irradiated. ..

Here, the projection mapping device is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a building or a natural object, and for example, the position (projection distance or angle) of an accessory which is a screen described later. By projecting an image according to the production information, which is generated based on the shape and shape, it is possible to produce an advanced and powerful production.

(Display unit 100: Illumination light device B)
As shown in FIG. 7, the irradiation light device B is arranged in front of the projector mechanism B2 that emits the irradiation light forward and the projector mechanism B2, and the irradiation light from the projector mechanism B2 is arranged diagonally downward and rearward. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects in the device C direction, and a projector cover B1 that houses the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit 100: Illumination light device B: Projector mechanism B2)
The projector mechanism B2 constitutes a video output means that outputs video by irradiation light. The projector mechanism B2 is arranged at the rear part in the cabinet 61. The projector mechanism B2 has a horizontally arranged flat plate-shaped base member B22. A lens mechanism B21 and a light source (not shown) are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The lens mechanism B21 is arranged so as to emit the irradiation light emitted from the light source toward the front mirror mechanism B3.

Further, heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 are arranged on the right side and the left side of the lens mechanism B21 and the light source, respectively. The heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 have a duct for passing air and a fan for sending out air, and by blowing the air backward, the heat generated when the irradiation light is generated is forcibly pushed backward. It is designed to flow. Ventilation holes of the cabinet 61 are arranged in the air flow direction in the heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24. As a result, the heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 can forcibly discharge the heat of the projector mechanism B2 together with the air to the outside of the machine through the ventilation holes.

(Display unit 100: Illumination light device B: Mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIG. 7, the mirror mechanism B3 is arranged in front of the projector mechanism B2 (the emission direction of the irradiation light). As shown in FIG. 8, the mirror mechanism B3 includes a mirror holder B31, an optical mirror B32 housed in the mirror holder B31, and mirror stoppers B33 and B34 for fixing both ends of the optical mirror B32 to the mirror holder B31. doing. As shown in FIG. 9, the mirror holder B31 is formed in a rectangular plate shape on the front surface. An angle adjusting hole B311 is formed at each corner of the mirror holder B31, and a recess B312 is formed on the front surface centering on the angle adjusting hole B311. Further, mounting holes B314 and B314 are formed vertically symmetrically between the angle adjusting holes B311 and B311 in the vertical direction.

Further, a mirror holding portion B313 is formed on the rear surface of the mirror holder B31. The mirror holding portion B313 is formed in the central portion, and is formed in a size that does not overlap the angle adjusting hole B311 and the mounting hole B314. Mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are provided on the left side and the right side of the mirror holding portion B313, respectively. The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 have angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 and mounting holes B334 and B344, respectively. The angle adjusting holes B331, B341 and mounting holes B334 and B344 in the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are arranged so as to correspond to the angle adjusting holes B311 and B311 and the mounting holes B314 and B314 in the mirror holder B31.

The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are partially formed so as to overlap the mirror holding portion B313. As a result, the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 come into contact with both left and right sides of the optical mirror B32 fitted to the mirror holding portion B313, and are screwed to the mirror holder B31 through the mounting holes B314, B334 and B344. , The optical mirror B32 is held by the mirror holder B31.

As shown in FIG. 10, the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above is provided on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11 in the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed in the front central portion of the projector cover B1 and is arranged so as to be exposed to the front side when the upper door 62a is opened. The reflector holding portion B11 has an angle adjusting hole B111. The angle adjusting hole B111 is formed at a position corresponding to the angle adjusting hole B311 of the mirror mechanism B3.

A screw (not shown) is inserted into the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 from the front side, and this screw penetrates the angle adjusting hole B311 of the mirror holder B31. The angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed as screw holes into which screws can be screwed, and the screws penetrating the angle adjusting holes B311 of the mirror holder B31 are the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. It is screwed into the angle adjusting holes B331 and B341.

Then, when the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screw with the angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 is loosened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is increased. On the other hand, when the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screw with the angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 is tightened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is shortened.

As described above, the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are screwed together via the mounting holes B314, B334 and B344, whereby the optical mirror is formed between the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. B32 is sandwiched. In this way, the mirror holder B31, the optical mirror B32, and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are integrated as a mirror mechanism B3, and the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is changed by the rotation of the screw. As a result, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be increased or decreased. Since the angle adjusting holes B311 and B331 and B341 are arranged in four directions corresponding to the corners of the mirror mechanism B3, the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism at the arrangement positions of the angle adjusting holes B311 and B331 and B341 are arranged. By increasing or decreasing the distance from B3, it is possible to finely adjust the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector mechanism B2.

Further, a spring (not shown) is provided between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31. The rear end surface of the spring is in contact with the recess B312 of the mirror holder B31, and the front end surface is in contact with the inner wall surface (rear wall surface) of the reflector holding portion B11, so that the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31 It is sandwiched between. Then, a screw inserted through the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 penetrates the spring. As a result, even if the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 increases as the screw rotates, the screw head comes into contact with the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 due to the urging force of the spring. It is possible to prevent the screw head from protruding from the angle adjusting hole B111 and breaking the positional relationship between the reflector holding portion B11 and the screw.

(Display unit 100: Illumination light device B: Projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 11, the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above are housed in the projector cover B1. The projector cover B1 includes a horizontally arranged upper wall portion B12, a reflector holding portion B11 arranged on the front side of the upper wall portion B12, and side wall portions B13 and B13 arranged symmetrically in the left-right direction of the upper wall portion B12. And have. The front portion of the upper wall portion B12 projects forward from the cabinet 61 of FIG. A reflector holding portion B11 is formed in a form protruding forward in the central portion of the front side of the upper wall portion B12, and the above-mentioned mirror mechanism B3 is held in a space formed by the protrusion so that the angle can be adjusted. ..

Further, the side wall portions B13 and B13 have a protruding portion B131 protruding in the horizontal direction from the lower end portion. The protruding portion B131 has a first protruding portion B131a on the front side and a second protruding portion B131b on the rear side. The first protrusion B131a is formed at a position corresponding to the opening of the cabinet 61 when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet 61, and is set to a width slightly smaller than the width of the opening of the cabinet 61. Has been done. On the other hand, the second protruding portion B131b is formed at a position corresponding to the space behind the opening of the cabinet 61 when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet 61, and is wider than the width of the space behind. It is set to a slightly smaller width. That is, each of the side wall portions B13 and B13 is formed so that the width of the second protruding portion B131b is wider than the width of the first protruding portion B131a. As a result, the projector cover B1 can cover most of the internal space in the cabinet 61.

A perforated plate B15 having a plurality of holes B151 is provided on the lower surface side of the projector cover B1. The perforated plate B15 is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed by punching a plate made of metal (for example, stainless steel, iron, steel, aluminum, etc.). The plurality of holes B151 are formed so as to be substantially evenly dispersed on the entire surface of the perforated plate B15. The perforated plate B15 allows air to flow over the entire surface of the perforated plate B15, and enables air to flow from the lower side to the upper side by suction by the heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 of the projector mechanism B2. The size and number of holes B151 are set so that the inside of the projector cover B1 cannot be visually recognized from the outside. The hole B151 is formed in a shape such as a circle, a square, or a hexagon, and the hole diameter is about 3 to 5 mm.

The perforated plate B15 is formed so as to cover the first protruding portion B131a and the second protruding portion B131b of the projector cover B1 from the lower position. As shown in FIG. 13, the perforated plate B15 has an upper portion B15a on the front side, an inclined portion B15b on the middle side, and a lower portion B15c on the rear side. The upper portion B15a is horizontally arranged. The inclined portion B15b is formed by being bent diagonally downward and rearward from the rear side of the upper portion B15a. The lower side portion B15c is formed by being bent in the horizontal direction from the rear side of the inclined portion B15b.

The upper portion B15a of the perforated plate B15 is attached to the side wall portions B13 and B13 of the projector cover B1. As a result, the perforated plate B15 is arranged so that the front portion of the projector cover B1 is covered from the lower side by the upper portion B15a, and the inclined portion B15b and the lower portion B15c cover the front portion of the projector cover B1 from the lower portion to the rear portion. There is. As shown in FIG. 11, the front screen mechanism E1 in the screen device C is arranged below the perforated plate B15.

Although the details will be described later, the front screen mechanism E1 has a front standby position arranged on the upper side, which is a standby posture for prohibiting the appearance of an image due to irradiation light, and a lower side, which is an exposure posture for allowing the appearance of an image due to irradiation light. The front screen mechanism E1 in the standby posture is tilted so as to be substantially parallel to the tilted portion B15b of the perforated plate B15 so as to be rotatable between the front exposed position and the exposed position. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the exposed posture, a large space portion appears below the perforated plate B15, and the air existing in this space reaches the perforated plate B15 without flow resistance, and a plurality of spaces are present. By passing through the hole B151, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of air into the screen device C and improve the cooling efficiency.

Further, by providing the perforated plate B15 so as to cover the lower surface of the projector cover B1, for example, as shown in FIG. 14, the position of the player's line of sight located on the front side is the center of the screen device C in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. Even if it exists on the horizontal line of the portion and looks up at the irradiation light device B from this line-of-sight position, the perforated plate B15 prevents the inside of the irradiation light device B from being visually observed.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C)
As shown in FIG. 15, the irradiation light device B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screwing. As a result, the display unit 100 can unite the irradiation light device B and the screen device C and handle them integrally.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen housing C10)
The screen device C has a box-shaped screen housing C10. As shown in FIG. 16, the screen housing C10 includes a horizontally arranged bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2 erected at the right end of the bottom plate C1, and a left side plate C3 erected at the left end of the bottom plate C1. And a back plate C4 erected at the rear end of the bottom plate C1. As a result, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 are connected to the bottom plate C1 by screwing, so that the front side where the player is located and the upper surface side where the irradiation light device B is located are connected. An open box-shaped screen housing C10 is formed.

The bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 constituting the screen housing C10 are each independently formed into a predetermined shape, and a predetermined functional component such as a fixed screen mechanism D can be attached. Has been made. As a result, even if the unit of the screen device C cannot be standardized as a whole, the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 can be standardized for each plate member. Further, since it is possible to partially change each plate member, it is possible to easily change the specifications for each model of the pachislot machine 1.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Bottom plate C1)
Specifically, the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape having a rectangular top view. The upper surface of the bottom plate C1 has a central mounting portion C11 arranged in the central portion, and a right mounting portion C12 and a left mounting portion C13 arranged in the left-right direction about the central mounting portion C11. There is. These mounting portions C11, C12, and C13 are formed in a concave shape. The central mounting portion C11 mounts the fixed screen mechanism D so that it can be positioned by fitting the lower end portion of the fixed screen mechanism D. The right mounting portion C12 and the left mounting portion C13 position the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, respectively, by fitting the lower ends of the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, respectively. It is placed as possible.

Further, the front side portion C14 of the bottom plate C1 is bent downward so that the tip portion thereof is positioned below the lower surface of the bottom plate C1. A plurality of through holes C141 are formed in the front side portion C14. As shown in FIG. 6, when the display unit 100 is mounted on the intermediate support plate 301 of the cabinet 61 and incorporated, the front side portion C14 abuts on the front surface of the intermediate support plate 301 in the cabinet 61. It makes it possible to perform rearward positioning. Then, the display unit 100 is screwed to the front surface of the cabinet 61 through the through hole C141 of the front side portion C14, so that the display unit 100 can be assembled and installed from the front side of the cabinet 61. It is possible.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Right side plate C2, Left side plate C3)
As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen housing C10 have operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and the display unit 100 can be carried by hooking a hand on the operation openings C21 and C31. The operating openings C21 and C31 are arranged on the sides of the crank gears E21 and E21 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operating openings C21 and C31 are formed in a rectangular shape in which the longitudinal directions are aligned in the horizontal direction. The opening areas of the operating openings C21 and C31 are set so that the crank gears E21 and E21 can be manually operated from the outside.

As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 in the standby position is manually moved after the display unit 100 is incorporated in the cabinet 61, the display unit 100 is first taken out from the front side of the cabinet 61 in which the upper door 62a is opened. Specifically, an operator located on the front side of the cabinet 61 releases the screws of the display unit 100 to the cabinet 61 and removes the screws. Then, the display unit 100 is taken out of the cabinet 61 by reaching into the cabinet 61 and grasping the operating openings C21 and C31 of the display unit 100 with both hands. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 18, one of the operating openings C21 of the removed display unit 100 reaches into the screen device C, and the crank gear E21 that is visible in the horizontal direction from the operating opening C21 is rotated. As a result, the locked front screen mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. The locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 will be described later. When the locked state is released by moving from the standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 can be quickly rotated to a desired position.

With the upper door 62a open, reach out from the front of the opening of the cabinet 61 into the space between the side wall 302 of the cabinet 61 and the right side plate C2 of the screen device C, and from the operation opening C21. By operating the crank gear E21, the crank gear E21 can be rotated. In this case, the locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 can be released without removing the display unit 100 from the cabinet 61.

Further, a motor accommodating portion C22 is formed on the right side plate C2. The motor accommodating portion C22 accommodates the drive motor F21 as the first accessory driving means configured by the accessory driving means for driving the reel screen drive mechanism F2 as a movable accessory.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Back plate C4)
As shown in FIG. 19, the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape, and a relay board CK is provided on the back surface. The relay board CK makes it possible to collect a plurality of signal lines in the display unit 100 and perform wiring to the outside of the display unit 100 at one place. The relay board CK is provided on the back surface of the back plate C4 so that it is arranged in front of the back wall of the cabinet 61. That is, the relay board CK is arranged in the gap between the back wall of the cabinet 61 and the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10. As shown in FIG. 6, a through hole 303 of the intermediate support plate 301 that supports the display unit 100 is arranged below the relay board CK, and a signal line of the relay board CK is inserted therethrough.

As a result, the relay board is arranged outside the screen device C, which facilitates the wiring work and eliminates the need to secure an installation space for the relay board CK in the screen device C. The degree of freedom of design in the device C is expanded.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19, an operation opening C41 is formed in the back plate C4. The operation opening C41 is arranged at the lower right side and faces the intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation opening C41 is formed in a size that allows the intermediate gear E23 to be manually operated. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 in the standby position is manually moved after the display unit 100 is assembled in the cabinet 61, the display unit 100 is first removed from the cabinet 61. After that, by reaching into the screen device C from the operation opening C41 and rotating the intermediate gear E23 that can be seen horizontally from the operation opening C41, the locked front screen mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. Can be moved.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen mechanism)
Inside the screen housing C10, a screen mechanism as a plurality of display devices for displaying an image by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is provided so that the irradiation target can be switched. Specifically, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as a plurality of screen mechanisms. The detailed structure of each screen mechanism D, E1, F1 will be described later.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen positional relationship)
As shown in FIG. 20, the fixed screen mechanism D is provided in a fixed state at a fixed exposure position existing in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light. As shown in FIG. 21, the front screen mechanism E1 is rotatably provided between the front exposed position and the front standby position. The positional relationship between the fixed exposure position and the front exposure position is set so that the front exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and exists in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front exposed position, the front screen mechanism E1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, so that the image due to the irradiation light appears only in the front screen mechanism E1. It is possible. When the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that the image due to the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

The front screen mechanism E1 includes a front standby position sensor E15a for detecting that the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position and a front exposure position sensor E15a for detecting that the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front exposed position. E15b is provided. For example, the front standby position sensor E15a and the front exposure position sensor E15b are each composed of a photo sensor.

In the present embodiment, the front standby position corresponds to the first reference position or the second reference position. Further, the front standby position corresponds to the first position, and the front exposed position corresponds to the second position. Therefore, the front standby position sensor E15a constitutes the first position sensor, and the front exposed position sensor E15b constitutes the second position sensor.

The front exposed position may correspond to the first reference position or the second reference position. Further, the front standby position may correspond to the second position, and the front exposed position may correspond to the first position. In this case, the front standby position sensor E15a constitutes the second position sensor, and the front exposed position sensor E15b constitutes the first position sensor.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22, the reel screen mechanism F1 is provided so as to be rotatable between the reel exposed position and the reel standby position. The positional relationship between the reel exposed position and the fixed exposed position is set so that the reel exposed position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and exists in front of the fixed exposed position. As a result, when the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel exposed position, the reel screen mechanism F1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, so that the image due to the irradiation light appears only in the reel screen mechanism F1. It is possible. When the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that the image due to the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

The reel screen mechanism F1 is provided with a reel standby position sensor F19 for detecting that the reel screen mechanism F1 is in the reel standby position. For example, the reel standby position sensor F19 is each composed of a photo sensor.

In the present embodiment, the reel standby position corresponds to the first reference position or the second reference position. The reel standby position corresponds to the first position. Therefore, the reel standby position sensor F19 constitutes the first position sensor.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the reel screen mechanism F1 has a narrow movable range, the reel exposed position sensor is not provided. However, for example, like the front screen mechanism E1, the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel exposed position. A second position sensor may be configured by the reel exposed position sensor by providing a reel exposed position sensor (not shown) for detecting the presence.

Further, the reel exposed position may correspond to the first reference position or the second reference position, the reel standby position may correspond to the second position, and the reel exposed position may correspond to the first position. In this case, the reel standby position sensor F19 constitutes the second position sensor, and the reel exposed position sensor constitutes the first position sensor.

The positional relationship between the front standby position and the reel standby position is set so that the front screen mechanism E1 existing in the front standby position and the reel screen mechanism F1 existing in the reel standby position do not interfere with each other. That is, the front standby position is arranged above the fixed screen mechanism D, while the reel standby position is arranged behind the fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, the rotation distance of the front screen mechanism E1 is shorter than the rotation distance of the reel screen mechanism F1.

The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are different from each other in the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 so as to minimize the overlap of the operating regions due to rotation. ing. Specifically, the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 is set above the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 in the front standby position direction. As a result, the movement of the front screen mechanism E1 is set to the minimum.

Further, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are rotatable on condition that at least one of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 is present in the standby position. As a result, interference between the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 during rotation is prevented.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Fixed screen mechanism D)
As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the fixing screen mechanism D is fixed on the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 by screwing. The fixed screen mechanism D includes a front reflection unit D1, a right surface reflection unit D2, a left surface reflection unit D3, and a bottom surface reflection unit D4. The reflecting surfaces of these reflecting units D1 to D4 are set at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B.

The fixed screen mechanism D may have, for example, two, three, or five reflecting portions as long as it has a plurality of reflecting surfaces having different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light. Alternatively, it may be provided with a reflecting portion of a curved or arc-shaped reflecting surface in which the center point of curvature is located on the front side at continuously different angles with respect to the optical axis.

The front reflecting portion D1 has a reflecting surface arranged so as to face the player on the front side, and reflects most of the reflected light from the irradiation light device B arranged in the front upper part of the fixed screen mechanism D forward. It is set to do. The right-side reflection portion D2 and the left-side reflection portion D3 are joined to the right-side portion and the left-side portion of the front-side reflection portion D1, and are arranged symmetrically with respect to the front-side reflection portion D1. The right-side reflecting portion D2 and the left-side reflecting portion D3 are arranged so that the width between the front end portions is larger than the width in the left-right direction of the front reflecting portion D1. As a result, the right-side reflection unit D2 and the left-side reflection unit D3 make it easier for the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflection surface to be in the direction of the front reflection portion D1, so that a part of the irradiation light is frontal while displaying an image by the irradiation light. It is designed to reflect in the direction of the reflecting portion D1. Further, also for the bottom surface reflecting portion D4, the direction of reflection of the irradiation light on the reflecting surface tends to be directed toward the front reflecting portion D1, so that a part of the irradiation light is directed toward the front reflecting portion D1 while the image of the irradiation light appears. It is designed to reflect.

In the above-mentioned fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the reflecting surface is set lower than the brightness of each reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 described later. That is, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the amount of light reflected by the irradiation light on the reflecting surface is smaller than the amount of light reflected on the reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. As a result, the fixed screen mechanism D prevents blurring due to mixing of light due to diffused reflection of the reflecting portions D1 to D4. In the fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the other reflecting portions D2, D3, and D4 may be lower than the brightness of the front reflecting portion D1. In this case, since the reflection of the irradiation light by the other reflecting portions D2, D3, and D4 to the front reflecting portion D1 can be reduced, it is possible to reduce the white blur while making the image strongly appear in the front reflecting portion D1.

As the brightness, Brightness in the L * a * b * color system (L * a * b * color space) and the L * u * v * color system (L * u * v * color space) is adopted. However, any color can be defined as long as white can be used as a reference and other colors can be represented by relative values.

The brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the brightness of the reflective surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are such that the brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D is the reflection of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. It is not particularly limited as long as it is lower than the brightness of the surface. For example, the brightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D may be set to a value about 5 to 25% (or 10 to 20%) lower than the brightness of the reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1.

In order to make the brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D lower than the brightness of the reflective surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the color of the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is changed to the front screen. The color may be blacker than the color of the paint applied to the base material of the mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. For example, a white paint is used as the paint to be applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, and the paint to be applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. A paint to which a black pigment is added to the paint to be applied to the base material may be used.

In such a paint, the brightness of the reflective surface of the screen mechanism can be changed by changing the ratio of the white pigment (for example, titanium oxide) and the black pigment (for example, carbon black). For example, the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 contains only the white pigment among the white pigment and the black pigment, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D includes Both white and black pigments may be included. Further, the ratio of the black pigment to the white pigment is (for example, 5 to 25% (or, for example)) in the paint applied to the fixed screen mechanism D than in the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. It may be increased by about 10 to 20%). As the paint to be applied to the base material of these screen mechanisms, conventionally known screen paints can be appropriately adopted, and screen types (for example, diffusion type and reflection type) can be appropriately used.
It can be adjusted according to.

The paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D does not contain the black pigment, but the black pigment is dispersed in the resin that is the material of the base material before molding the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D. By doing so, the base material itself may be colored and the brightness of the base material itself may be lowered.

Further, from the viewpoint of preventing diffused reflection of light, the members constituting the screen housing C10 such as the peripheral walls (bottom plate C1, right side plate C2, left side plate C3, and back plate C4) and the inside of the screen housing C10. It is also desirable to reduce the brightness of other members (members other than the screen) arranged in. It is desirable that the brightness of these members is lower than the brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. For example, if the brightness is low, it is not necessary to consider that the image is projected as a screen on the surrounding wall. The lower the better. That is, the closer the color of the surrounding wall is to black, the more desirable it is.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Front screen mechanism E1)
As shown in FIG. 23, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a rectangular front screen member E11 having a projection surface E11a on the entire surface and a front screen support base E12 having a pattern such as a first pattern surface E12a on both sides. Have. The front screen member E11 is formed by applying a screen paint to a thin plate-shaped flat panel. As a result, the front screen member E11 has the projection surface E11a formed flat so that an image without distortion appears when irradiated with the irradiation light.

On the other hand, the front screen support base E12 has a holding recess E121 for holding the front screen member E11. The holding recess E121 has an opening shape similar to that of the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11 in a slightly enlarged state, and accommodates the entire front screen member E11. Further, the holding recess E121 is set in two stages of depth, a deep portion and a shallow portion. The shallow portion is realized by a step portion E121a formed on the peripheral edge portion of the front screen support base E12 and a step portion E121b formed linearly to both ends in the lateral direction passing through the central portion.

As a result, the front screen member E11 housed in the holding recess E121 is brought into contact with and supported by the stepped portion E121a of the peripheral edge portion and the linear stepped portion E121b passing through the central portion, and is separated from the remaining deep portion. It is in a state. As a result, it is prevented that the deformation of the front screen support base E12 in the deep portion deforms the front screen member E11 and causes distortion in the projection surface E11a.

Further, the front screen support base E12 has a first pattern surface E12a in a part of a region around the projection surface E11a. The first pattern surface E12a is made visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front exposed position. Further, the front screen support base E12 has a second pattern surface E12b on the entire surface opposite to the first pattern surface E12a. The second pattern surface E12b is made visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front standby position. In these first pattern surface E12a and second pattern surface E12b, for example, a pattern related to the production of a game is three-dimensionally formed by unevenness.

The front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 configured as described above are integrally formed by being formed separately and then bonded with an adhesive. As a result, even if a sink mark may occur due to molding shrinkage or the like when the front screen mechanism E1 forms a pattern or the like on the front screen support base E12, the sink mark is mechanically separated from the front screen member E11. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the front screen member E11 from being distorted due to the sinking of the projection surface E11a.

The method of fixing the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 is not limited to the bonding with an adhesive, and any method such as screw fastening can be adopted.

The flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 are each manufactured by injection molding. As the material of the flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12, a thermoplastic resin (for example, ABS resin or the like) that may cause sink marks when injection molding is performed may be appropriately adopted. it can.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Front screen drive mechanism E2)
The front screen mechanism E1 is rotatable by the driving force of the front screen drive mechanism E2. As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the front screen drive mechanism E2 has a left front screen drive mechanism E2A connected to the lower surface of the left end portion of the front screen mechanism E1 and a right connected to the lower surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1. It has a front screen drive mechanism E2B.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B includes a crank member E22, a crank gear E21, an intermediate gear E23, a motor shaft gear E24, and a drive motor E25. The drive motor E25 constitutes a second accessory driving means composed of the accessory driving means for driving the front screen mechanism E1 as a movable accessory.

The upper end (one end) of the crank member E22 in the right front screen drive mechanism E2B is connected to the lower surface of the right end of the front screen mechanism E1. As shown in FIG. 26, the crank member E22 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 of FIG. 16 at the intermediate position E22a. As a result, the crank member E22 makes the upper end portion and the lower end portion (the other end portion) rotatable about the intermediate position E22a as the center of rotation.

The crank member E22 has an upper region on the upper end side from the intermediate position E22a and a lower region on the lower end side from the intermediate position E22a. When the crank member E22 is viewed from the side as shown in FIG. 26, the center line in the upper region (the straight line passing between the intermediate position E22a and the midpoint on the upper end side of the crank member E22) is in the vertical direction in the standby posture. Is set to. On the other hand, the center line in the lower region (a straight line passing through the intermediate position E22a and the midpoint at the lower end side of the crank member E22) is set so that the lower side inclines toward the front side rather than the upper side in the standby posture.

A slide groove E22b is formed in the lower region of the crank member E22. The slide groove E22b is formed so that the groove wall surface E22b1 has a U-shape in a side view. The U-shape is composed of two straight portions and a curved portion connecting the ends of the two straight portions.
The two straight portions are formed in parallel, and the slide groove E22b has a surface corresponding to the straight portion of the groove wall surface E22b1 set parallel to the center line of the lower region. A slide member E26 is movably engaged with the slide groove E22b. The groove width of the slide groove E22b (distance between the two straight portions) is substantially the same as the member width of the slide member E26, and is set to slide during movement. That is, the slide member E26 is always in contact with the groove wall surface E22b1 of the slide groove E22b. Further, the upper end portion of the slide groove E22b is set so that the slide member E26 comes into contact with the upper end surface (the surface corresponding to the curved portion) when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture. On the other hand, the lower end of the slide groove E22b is open so that a part of the slide member E26 can be exposed.

The slide member E26 is rotatably supported at the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21. The rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 of FIG. 25. In the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, the line segment connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b is the intermediate position E22a in the crank member E22 and the slide member. It is set to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment connecting the center point of E26.

As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, even if a force acts in the direction of rotating the lower region of the crank member E22, the rotation center position is in the direction of applying all the components of this force. Since E21a exists and acts as a fixed end, the slide member E26 does not move. As a result, a truss structure is formed by a three-node link with 0 degrees of freedom, with the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 as fixed ends and the slide member E26 as the free end. Even when the mechanism E1 is pushed by hand, the front screen mechanism E1 does not move because the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 act as a strong brake.

An intermediate gear E23 is meshed with the crank gear E21. A motor shaft gear E24 is meshed with the intermediate gear E23. The drive shaft of the drive motor E25 is connected to the motor shaft gear E24. As a result, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B is capable of transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 to the crank gear E21 via the motor shaft gear E24 and the intermediate gear E23.

Here, all the components of the rotational driving force applied to the crank gear E21 coincide with the tangential direction of the turning locus of the slide member E26. Further, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 29, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, the line segment connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b is the intermediate position E22a in the crank member E22. Since it is set to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment connecting the center point of the slide member E26, the tangential direction of the turning locus is parallel to the groove wall surface of the slide groove E22b of the crank member E22. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, when a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, there is a groove wall surface that becomes a reaction force in the moving direction (tangential direction) of the slide member E26. Therefore, the crank gear E21 easily starts rotating.

When a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, the slide member E26 provided at the eccentric position E21b is made movable along the slide groove E22b by sliding with the slide groove E22b, so that the crank member E22 A two-node link with one degree of freedom is formed in which the intermediate position E22a and the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 are fixed ends, and the slide member E26 is a free end that can be moved along the groove wall surface. Then, when the slide member E26 rotates, the crank member E22 having the slide groove E22b with which the slide member E26 is engaged rotates with the intermediate position E22a as a fulcrum, and the upper region of the crank member E22 is rotated. Become. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 moves between the front standby position and the front exposed position.

As shown in FIGS. 26 to 29, the crank member E22 includes a detection piece E22c for causing the front standby position sensor E15a (see FIG. 21) to detect the front screen mechanism E1, and a front exposure position sensor for the front screen mechanism E1. A detection piece E22d for detection by E15b (see FIG. 21) is formed.

Further, the moving speed of the front screen mechanism E1 is 0 in the stopped state when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, and gradually increases to an intermediate posture between the standby posture and the exposed posture (FIG. 28). After reaching the maximum speed in, the vehicle gradually decelerates, and when the exposed posture and the standby posture are reached, the stopped state becomes 0.

As a result, the rotation of the crank gear E21 can be started and stopped in a state where the angular acceleration is small (moment of inertia), so that the torque required for the crank gear E21 can be reduced, and as a result, the drive mechanism ( It is possible to reduce failures and wear due to overload of the intermediate gear E23, the motor shaft gear E24, and the drive motor E25).

The front screen mechanism E1 in the front standby position in the standby posture and the front exposed position in the exposed posture corresponds to a stationary position capable of stopping even in a non-excited state in which the drive motor E25 is not excited. That is, the front standby position corresponds to the first rest position, and the front exposed position corresponds to the second rest position. The front standby position may be set as the second rest position, and the front exposed position may be set as the first rest position.

As shown in FIG. 16, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B configured as described above has the same configuration as the left front screen drive mechanism E2A except for the motor shaft gear E24 and the drive motor E25. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are arranged symmetrically. The crank gear E21 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the crank gear E21 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected via the shaft member E3, and the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 is evenly applied. There is.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Reel screen mechanism F1)
As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the reel screen mechanism F1 includes a reel screen portion F11 made of a curved flat plate, a left reel screen support portion F12 connected to the left end of the reel screen portion F11, and a reel screen portion F11. It has a right reel screen support portion F13 connected to the right end of the screen.

The reel screen portion F11 is curved in a shape similar to the rotation direction, and a pattern is formed on the back surface on the rotation center side. The pattern on the back surface is visible to the player in front when the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel standby position. Further, on the surface of the reel screen portion F11, a pattern is formed on the peripheral edge portion, and the inner peripheral region of the peripheral edge portion is a projection surface. On the projection surface, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel exposure position, an image can appear by irradiating the irradiation light.

One ends of the left and right reel screen support portions F12 and F13 are connected to the reel screen portion F11. On the other hand, the other ends of the reel screen support portions F12 and F13 each have a protruding portion (not shown). The protruding portion is projected horizontally to the outside of the reel screen support portions F12 and F13, and is connected to the reel screen drive mechanism F2 to serve as the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1.

The reel screen mechanism F1 in the reel standby position and the reel exposed position corresponds to a stationary position capable of stopping even in a non-excited state in which the drive motor F21 is not excited. That is, the reel standby position corresponds to the first rest position, and the reel exposed position corresponds to the second rest position. The reel standby position may be set to the second rest position, and the reel exposed position may be set to the first rest position.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Directing by the screen device)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, various effects are executed by using the display unit 100 described above. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, by switching a plurality of screen mechanisms for displaying an image by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B, an effect using a flat image display and a sense of depth (three-dimensional effect) are obtained. It is possible to perform an effect using a certain image display and an effect using a curved image display.

For example, when the screen mechanism that causes an image to appear by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is switched to the front screen mechanism E1, the image is made to appear on the flat projection surface E11a, which causes distortion during irradiation of the irradiation light. It is possible to make an image without a light appear, and it is possible to perform an effect using this flat image.

Further, for example, when the screen mechanism that causes an image to appear by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is switched to the fixed screen mechanism D, a sense of depth (three-dimensional effect) is obtained by the plurality of reflecting portions of the fixed screen mechanism D. It is possible to make an image with a certain appearance appear, and it is possible to perform an effect using this image with a sense of depth.

Further, for example, when the screen mechanism that causes an image to appear by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is switched to the reel screen mechanism F1, the image is caused to appear on the reel screen portion F11 made of a curved flat plate. A curved image can be made to appear, and an effect using the curved image can be executed.

[Display example of touch panel unit]
Subsequently, the display screen displayed on the image display device 201a of the touch panel unit 201 will be described. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a part of a display screen displayed on the image display device 201a. As shown in FIG. 30, the image display device 201a displays a plurality of display screens including a top screen 211, a menu screen 212, and a game information screens 213, 214, 215. These plurality of display screens can be switched according to the operation of the player received via the touch sensor 201b of the touch panel unit 201.

The top screen 211 is an initial screen among the display screens displayed on the touch panel unit 201, and displays the MENU button 211a and the outline game history 211b. The MENU button 211a is an operation button that calls the menu screen 212 when operated (tapped) by the player. The summary game history 211b displays a part of the game history (summary game history) of the game history of the pachislot machine 1. In the present embodiment, for example, the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, and the number of games (number of games) in the pachislot machine 1 are displayed as the outline game history.

The menu screen 212 is a menu of the display screen displayed on the touch panel unit 201, and includes a back button 212a, a record button 212b, an explanation button 212c, an array payout button 212d, a reach button 212e, and a WEB site button 212f. And the volume button 212g are displayed. The back button 212a is an operation button that calls the top screen 211 by being operated by the player. Further, the record button 212b to the volume button 212g are operation buttons for calling the corresponding display screen by being operated by the player.

For example, when the recording button 212b is operated by the player, the recording operation screen 216 relating to the recording of the game-related information (hereinafter, simply referred to as “game information”) as shown in FIG. 31 is called. In recent pachislot machines, a service is widely provided in which a player is registered for each model and various game information such as the achievement status of a predetermined mission is managed from the game history of the player so far. There is. The recording operation screen 216 called by the recording button 212b is an operation screen related to this service.

As shown in FIG. 31, the recording operation screen 216 displays a recording start button 216a, a recording reference button 216b, a recording end button 216c, a registration button 216d, a back button 216e, and a MENU button 216f. ..

The recording start button 216a is an operation button for starting recording of game information. When the recording start button 216a is operated, the identification information of the pachislot machine 1 and the two-dimensional code (for example, QR code (registered trademark)) representing the URL (Uniform Resource Locator) of the server are displayed. By reading this two-dimensional code with a mobile terminal such as a mobile phone, the mobile terminal can register the combination of the pachislot machine 1 and the user in the server.

The record reference button 216b is an operation button for referring to the game information. When the record reference button 216b is operated, a two-dimensional code representing the recorded game information is displayed. By reading this two-dimensional code, the mobile terminal can display the recorded game information directly or via the server. When the record reference button 216b is operated, the recorded game information may be displayed on the image display device 201a or the like.

The recording end button 216c is an operation button for ending the recording of game information. When the recording end button 216c is operated, the recording of the game information is completed, and the two-dimensional code representing the recorded game information is displayed. By reading this two-dimensional code, the mobile terminal can register the recorded game information in the server.

The registration button 216d is an operation button for registering the user in the service. When the registration button 216d is operated, a two-dimensional code representing the URL of the server is displayed. By reading this two-dimensional code, the mobile terminal can access the site for registering the user in the service. The back button 216e and the MENU button 216f are operation buttons for displaying the menu screen 211 and the menu screen 212 on the touch panel unit 201.

In FIG. 30, when the explanation button 212c is operated by the player, the explanation screen (not shown) of the pachislot machine 1 is called. The contents to be explained on the explanation screen include, for example, an explanation about the specifications of the pachi-slot machine 1 such as a bonus winning probability and an ART winning probability for each set value, and an introduction of characters appearing in the production of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, when the array payout button 212d is operated by the player, the array payout screen (not shown) of the pachislot machine 1 is called. On the array payout screen, for example, the correspondence between the combination of symbols determined to be a prize in the pachislot machine 1 and the privilege when the prize is determined (dividend table), and the symbols drawn on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Rows (reel arrangement) etc. are displayed.

Further, when the reach-eye button 212e is operated by the player, the reach-eye screen (not shown) of the pachi-slot machine 1 is called. On the reach eye screen, the reach eye of the pachislot machine 1 is displayed. The reach eye is a combination of symbols to which a special privilege is given by being displayed along the effective line. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reach eye lip shown in FIGS. 38 and 39. The combination of symbols is applicable. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the combination of the symbols of the reach eyes is displayed along the effective line, the player is subsequently in an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state, a normal ART or CT (figure)). It is confirmed that the transition to 36)) will be made.

Further, when the WEB site button 212f is operated by the player, the WEB introduction screen (not shown) of the pachislot machine 1 is called. On the WEB introduction screen, a two-dimensional code (for example, QR code (registered trademark)) indicating the URL of an arbitrary WEB site such as a special WEB site provided for each model of the pachislot machine 1 or a WEB site of the manufacturer of the pachislot machine 1). Is displayed. The player can access the corresponding WEB site by reading the two-dimensional code displayed on the WEB introduction screen with a mobile phone or the like.

Further, when the volume button 212g is operated by the player, a volume adjustment screen (not shown) for adjusting the volume of the sound output from the speakers 9L and 9R is called. The player can adjust the volume of the effect sound of the pachi-slot machine 1 via the volume adjustment screen.

Here, since the touch panel unit 201 is provided separately from the display unit 100 that performs the effect, it can be controlled separately from the display unit 100, and during the game (that is, the effect is being executed by the display unit 100). Even if there is, the display of the image display device 201a of the touch panel unit 201 can be switched. For the player, for example, he / she may want to know the characters appearing in the production in the display unit 100. In such a case, the explanation button 212c is operated to call the explanation screen to check the relationship between the characters. It can be grasped during the game. In addition, from the player's point of view, when the so-called rare role is won, it may be desired to grasp the symbol that should be used as a guide in order to win the rare role during the reel rotation. In such a case, the array payout button 212d The reel arrangement can be grasped by calling the arrangement payout screen by operating.

The game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are display screens for displaying detailed game history including an outline game history to be displayed on the top screen of the game history of the pachislot machine 1. The game information screen 213 displays a back button 213a, a MENU button 213b, a front button 213c, a next button 213d, and a game history 213e. The back button 213a and the MENU button 213b are operation buttons that call the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212, respectively, by being operated by the player. Further, the front button 213c and the next button 213d are operation buttons for switching the game information screen by being operated by the player, and when the front button 213c is operated, the game information screen is displayed from the game information screen 213. When the display screen is switched to 215 and the next button 213d is operated, the display screen is switched from the game information screen 213 to the game information screen 214. In addition, the game history 213e displays the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, and the number of games (number of games) in the pachislot machine 1.

The game information screen 214 displays a back button 214a, a MENU button 214b, a front button 214c, a next button 214d, and a game history 214e. The back button 214a and the MENU button 214b are operation buttons that call the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212, respectively, by being operated by the player. Further, the front button 214c and the next button 214d are operation buttons for switching the game information screen in a predetermined order by being operated by the player. In addition, the game history 214e displays the number of CZ (chance zone) rushes and the number of successes in the pachislot machine 1. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, since CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3 are provided as CZs, the number of rushes and the number of successes of CZ1 to 3 are displayed in the game history 214e.

The game information screen 215 displays a back button 215a, a MENU button 215b, a front button 215c, a next button 215d, and a game history 215e. The back button 215a and the MENU button 215b are operation buttons that call the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212, respectively, by being operated by the player. Further, the front button 215c and the next button 215d are operation buttons for switching the game information screen in a predetermined order by being operated by the player. In addition, the game history 215e displays the number of winnings and the winning probability (a fraction of one numerator) of the so-called small winning combination in the pachislot machine 1.

The display screen displayed on the image display device 201a of the touch panel unit 201 may be switched based on a tap operation on the operation buttons displayed on each display screen, or based on a swipe operation on the display screen. It may be switched.

[Electrical configuration of pachislot machines]
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachislot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 32, the pachislot machine 1 has a main control board 71 arranged in the cabinet 61 and a sub control board 72 arranged in the lower door 62b. The reel relay terminal board 51, the setting key type switch 52, the cabinet side relay board 53, the door relay terminal board 54, and the power supply board 44b of the power supply device 44 are electrically connected to the main control board 71. ing.

The reel relay terminal plate 51 is arranged inside the reel main body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 51 is electrically connected to the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and outputs a signal output from the main control board 71 to the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R. Relay.

The stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R change their symbols by rotating the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, that is, the start lever 6 being operated by the player (start operation). Let me. The stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R constitute a symbol changing means. The setting key type switch 52 is used when changing the setting of the pachi-slot machine 1 or when confirming the setting of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The external centralized terminal plate 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57 are electrically connected to the cabinet-side relay board 53. The cabinet-side relay board 53 relays signals output from the main control board 71 to the external centralized terminal board 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57. That is, the external centralized terminal plate 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57 are connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet-side relay board 53.

The external centralized terminal plate 56 is attached to the cabinet 61 and is provided to output signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, external signals 1 to 4, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1.

The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 penetrates the medal auxiliary storage (not shown). The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage is full of medals.

A power switch 44a is connected to the power supply board 44b of the power supply device 44. The power switch 44a is turned on when supplying the necessary power to the pachi-slot machine 1.

The door relay terminal plate 54 has a medal sensor 46, a door open / close monitoring switch 61, a BET switch 62, and a checkout, which are connected to the medal insertion slot 22 and arranged in a medal selector (not shown) arranged on the back side of the lower door 62b. The switch 63, the start switch 64, the stop switch board 65, the game operation display board 66, and the sub-relay board 69 are connected.

That is, when it is determined that the flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the time of receiving the start command. If it is determined that the accessory stop flag is not ON (NO), the sub CPU 102 requests the projector mechanism B2 to change the focus (S504), and ends the process at the time of receiving the start command. The medal sensor 46, the door open / close monitoring switch 61, the BET switch 62, the settlement switch 63, the start switch 64, the stop switch board 65, the game operation display board 66 and the sub relay board 69 are main control boards via the door relay terminal board 54. It is connected to 71.

The medal sensor 46 detects that the medal has passed through a selector (not shown), and outputs the detection result to the main control board 71. The door open / close monitoring switch 61 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening / closing of the upper door 62a and the lower door 62b to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The BET switch 62 detects that the MAX bet button 11 and the 1-bet button have been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 71. The medal sensor 46 and the MAX bet button 11 constitute a game medium detecting means for detecting the input of the game medium.

The settlement switch 63 detects that the settlement button 13 has been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 71. The start switch 64 detects that the start lever 6 has been operated by the player (start operation), and outputs the detection result to the main control board 71.

The stop switch board 65 is a board that constitutes a circuit for stopping a rotating reel and a circuit for displaying a stoptable reel by an LED or the like. The stop switch board 65 is provided with stop switches 17S corresponding to the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. The stop switch 17S is used for a stop operation for stopping the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, that is, for the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R that detect that the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R have been pressed by the player. The corresponding stop switch 17S constitutes a stop operation detecting means.

The game operation display board 66 displays the number of inserted medals on the 7-segment display 28 when receiving the insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotatable, and when the game is replayed. It is a substrate for making it. A 7-segment display 28 and an LED 70 are connected to the game operation display board 66. The LED 70, for example, lights a mark indicating the start of the game, a mark for replaying the game, and the like.

The sub-relay board 69 relays the wiring connecting the sub-control board 72 and the main control board 71. Further, the sub-relay board 69 relays the wiring connecting the sub-control board 72 and a plurality of boards arranged around the sub-control board 72. That is, the sub-relay board 69 is electrically connected to the sub-control board 72, the sound I / O board 81, the LED board 82, the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74, the touch sensor 201b, and the projector mechanism B2. Has been done.

The sub-control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 54 and the sub-relay board 69 from the main control board 71 to the sub-control board 72 in one direction by serial communication. Further, the sub-control board 72 includes a sound I / O board 81, an LED board 82, a 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74, a touch sensor 201b, a projector mechanism B2, and a drive motor E25 via a sub-relay board 69. The drive motor F21, the chance switch 35 as an effect operation detecting means for detecting the pressing of the chance button 33, the front standby position sensor E15a, the front exposed position sensor E15b, and the reel standby position sensor F19 are electrically connected. It is connected. The drive motor E25 and the drive motor F21 are composed of a two-phase excitation type stepping motor.

The sound I / O board 81 outputs audio to the speakers 9L and 9R. The LED board 82 causes the LEDs included in the LED group 75 to emit light in accordance with the effect executed by the control of the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 34) to display the blinking pattern.

The LED group 75 is a reel back lamp (not shown) arranged to irradiate the pattern rows drawn on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and composed of a plurality of full-color LEDs, decorative LEDs 23a, 23b, and a chance button. Also includes LED34 and the like.

In the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74, a sensor (not shown) for detecting the opening / closing of the lower door 62b is attached to the frame of the lower door 62b, and based on the state of the sensor (for example, if the sensor is in the on state). (Open if closed or off), saves the history of opening and closing the lower door 62b.

Further, when the lower door 62b is opened, the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74 sends a signal to the effect that the lower door 62b is opened in order to display an error on the display unit 100 and the image display device 201a. Output to (sub-control circuit 101).

Due to the door opening / closing structure of the pachislot machine 1, the upper door 62a is locked with the lower door 62b closed so that the upper door 62a cannot be opened unless the lower door 62b is opened. The sensor that detects opening and closing is not installed.

In this way, the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74, the front standby position sensor E15a, the front exposure position sensor E15b, and the reel standby position sensor F19 are detected by the sub-control circuit 101 of the pachislot machine 1 due to an error, and the hopper device 43 The sensor for detecting an abnormality (not shown) and the medal sensor 46 constitute an error detecting means for detecting an error by the main control circuit 91.

The ROM cartridge board 76 and the video relay board 77 are connected to the sub-control board 72. The ROM cartridge board 76 is a board for managing a control program executed by the sub CPU 102 and data for producing images (video), audio, light (LED group 75), and communication.

The video relay board 77 is a board that converts and relays a video signal transmitted from the sub-control board 72 to the projector mechanism B2 and the image display device 201a according to the signal standards of the projector mechanism B2 and the image display device 201a.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the main control circuit 91 composed of the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachislot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 33, the main control circuit 91 as the main control unit controls the progress of the game with the microcomputer 92 installed on the main control board 71 as the main component. The microcomputer 92 includes a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94, and a main RAM 95.

The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (command signals) to the sub control circuit 101, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as internal winning combinations determined by executing the control program.

A clock pulse generation circuit 96 and a random number generator 98 are connected to the main CPU 93. The clock pulse generation circuit 96 generates a clock pulse. The main CPU 93 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535).

The main CPU 93 outputs pulses to the stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R by detecting reel indexes (not shown) provided on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, respectively. Count the number of times. As a result, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reels have rotated).

The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. This reel index is provided, for example, with a photosensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part, and is provided at a predetermined position of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and the light emitting part and the light receiving part are connected by rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. It is detected by a reel position detection unit (not shown) provided with a detection piece interposed between them.

Here, the management of the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Then, each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) required for rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is added one by one. The symbol counter is provided according to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared to a predetermined value (for example, 0) when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection unit (not shown).

That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the positions of the symbols of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

In the present embodiment, the maximum number of sliding pieces is basically set for four symbols. Therefore, when the left stop button 17L is pressed, the symbol of the left reel 3L in the middle of the display window 4 and each symbol within the range up to the symbol four ahead of the symbol can be stopped in the middle of the display window 4. It becomes a design.

<Sub-control circuit>
Next, the sub-control circuit 101 composed of the sub-control board 72 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the sub-control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 34, the sub-control circuit 101 as the sub-control unit is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91, and the effect content is determined and executed based on the command signal transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The peripheral devices such as the projector mechanism B2, the LED group 75, the speakers 9L, and 9R are controlled. The sub-control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM 103, a rendering processor 104, a VRAM 105 that also functions as a frame buffer, and a driver 106.

The sub CPU 102 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 76 in response to the command signal transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The ROM cartridge board 76 is basically composed of a program storage area and a data storage area.

The control program executed by the sub CPU 102 is stored in the program storage area. For example, in the control program, a main board communication task (not shown) for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91 and a random value for effect are extracted, and the content of effect (effect data) is determined and registered. The effect content determination process (see FIG. 107) executed from the main board communication task for the purpose is included. The sub CPU 102 that executes the effect content determination process constitutes the effect determination means and the effect execution means.

Further, the control program includes an accessory control task for controlling the positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 as movable accessories based on the effect contents determined in the effect content determination process, and an effect content determination process. The main task that mainly controls the display of images by the display unit 100 (see FIG. 2) and the touch panel unit 201 based on the determined effect content, the LED control task that controls the light output by the light source such as the LED group 75, and the speaker 9L. , A voice control task for controlling the output of sound by 9R, and the like are included.

The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation. In addition, a storage area for storing sound data related to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing a pattern of turning on and off light, a storage area for storing accessory data related to the operation of a movable accessory (see FIG. 79), and the like are included.

The sub-RAM 103 includes a storage area for registering the effect content and effect data determined in the effect content determination process (see FIG. 107), a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91, and the like. A backup storage area is provided for storing the game status, the internal winning combination, etc. transmitted from the main CPU 93, and the game information displayed on the game information screens 213, 214, and 215.

That is, the game information displayed on the game information screens 213, 214, 215 displayed on the image display device 201a of the touch panel unit 201 is stored by the backup power supply (not shown) even when the power of the pachislot machine 1 is off. The played game information is maintained.

The sub CPU 102, the rendering processor 104, the VRAM (including the frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create an image according to the animation data specified by the effect content, and display the created image on the display unit 100 or the image display device 201a.

Further, the sub CPU 102 causes the speakers 9L and 9R to output sounds such as BGM according to the sound data specified by the effect content. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the LED group 75 according to the lamp data specified by the effect content.

Further, the sub CPU 102 controls the positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 by the drive motor E25 and the drive motor F21 according to the accessory data specified by the effect content.

[Transition flow of game state of pachislot machine]
Next, the gaming state controlled by the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment and the transition flow thereof will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36.

<Transition flow of basic game state>
In the present embodiment, the main control board 71 manages the gaming state based on the presence / absence of winning / operating of the bonus, the type of the internal winning combination related to the replay, and the winning probability thereof. As shown in FIG. 35, the main control board 71 distinguishes between the bonus non-winning state, the inter-flag state, and the bonus state based on the presence / absence of winning / operating of the bonus (F_BB1, 2). Specifically, the bonus non-winning state is a state in which the bonus is not winning and the bonus is not operating, and the inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus is winning and the bonus is not operating, and the bonus state. Is the state in which the bonus is activated.

Whether or not the bonus is won is managed based on the data stored in the internal winning combination storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 95, and whether or not the bonus is activated is determined by the game state flag provided in the main RAM 95. It is managed based on the data stored in the storage area (not shown). Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination related to the bonus is carried over as the internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the bonus is activated. The inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination.

Further, the main control board 71 is provided with six types of states, from the RT0 gaming state to the RT5 gaming state, in which the types of internal winning combinations related to the replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other. The RT0 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, and the RT5 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is low, and the RT1 gaming state is the gaming state in which the winning combination related to the replay is the internal winning combination. It is a gaming state in which the probability of being determined as is a medium probability. Further, the RT3 gaming state and the RT4 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is high.

These RT0 gaming states to RT5 gaming states are managed based on the data stored in the game state flag storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 95. Specifically, the pachi-slot machine 1 has five flags from the RT1 game state flag to the RT5 game state flag, and the RT game state is managed by managing the on / off of these flags in the main RAM 95.
More specifically, the main control board 71 specifies the RT game state corresponding to the ON RT game state flag as the current RT game state. When all the RT game state flags are off, the main control board 71 identifies that the current RT game state is the RT1 game state.

As shown in FIG. 35, the main control board 71 plays a game from the bonus non-winning state to the inter-flag state when (1) the winning combination (F_BB1, 2) related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination in the bonus non-winning state. Transition the state. Then, when the winning combination related to the bonus is won in (2) the inter-flag state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the bonus state.

Further, when the number of medals exceeding the specified number (216) is paid out in the (3) bonus state, the main control board 71 ends the bonus state and shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the RT1 gaming state. In this RT1 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state after (4) 20 games have elapsed, and (5) bell spills are displayed before the 20 games have elapsed. Then, the gaming state is shifted from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. Further, in the RT0 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state when (5) bell spilled eyes are displayed.

Further, when the RT3 transition lip is displayed in the RT2 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state, and (7) displays the RT4 transition lip in the RT3 gaming state. Then, the gaming state is shifted from the RT3 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state. Further, when (8) a bell spill or an RT2 transition lip is displayed in the RT3 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT3 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state, and similarly, the bell in the RT4 gaming state. When a spill or an RT2 transition lip is displayed, the gaming state is shifted from the RT4 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state.

Here, the bell spills are determined for each type of push order bell when the push order bells (F_3 choice bell_1st, F_3 choice bell_2nd, F_3 choice bell_3rd) described later are determined as the internal winning combination. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing. Further, in the RT2 transition lip, when the maintenance lip (F_maintenance lip_1st, F_maintenance lip_2nd, F_maintenance lip_3rd) described later is determined as the internal winning combination, the pressing order determined for each type of maintenance lip is not specified. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct. Further, in the RT3 transition lip, when the RT3 lip (F_RT3 lip_1st, F_RT3 lip_213, F_RT3 lip_231, F_RT3 lip_3rd) described later is determined as the internal winning combination, the pressing order determined for each type of RT3 lip. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct. Further, in the RT4 transition lip, when the RT4 lip (F_RT4 lip_123, F_RT4 lip_132, F_RT4 lip_2nd, F_RT4 lip_3rd) described later is determined as the internal winning combination, the pressing order determined for each type of RT4 lip. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct.

<Transition flow of game state regarding presence / absence of notification>
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 manages the game state based on the presence / absence of the bonus win / operation, the type of the internal winning combination related to the replay, and the winning probability, and notifies the player of the advantageous stop operation. The game state is managed based on whether or not to play. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a transition flow of the gaming state regarding the presence or absence of notification.

As shown in FIG. 36, the main control board 71 of the pachislot machine 1 distinguishes between the general gaming state and the ART gaming state based on the presence or absence of notification. The general gaming state is basically a gaming state (non-ART) that does not notify the content of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player, and is a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. On the contrary, the ART gaming state is a gaming state for notifying a stop operation which is advantageous for the player, and is a gaming state which is advantageous for the player. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player decides to perform the game so as to shift from the general game state (with a bonus state depending on the situation) to the ART game state which is advantageous to the player. Become.

The general gaming state is a gaming state in which ART is not won among the RT0 to RT4 gaming states. As shown in FIG. 36, the general gaming state is composed of a normal gaming state and a CZ (chance zone). The normal game state and the CZ are game states in which the game states of the transition destinations are different from each other.In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the normal game state is changed to the CZ, and the CZ is changed to the ART game state. A game is played.

The normal gaming state is the most disadvantageous gaming state in the pachislot machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 36, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal gaming state to CZ. Specifically, the transition lottery to the CZ is performed in the normal gaming state, and (A) When the transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the CZ.

The CZ is a gaming state (chance zone) in which there is a high expectation for shifting to the ART gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 36, there is a possibility of shifting from the CZ to the normal gaming state or the ART gaming state. Specifically, the CZ performs a transition lottery to ART, and (B) when the transition lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the CZ to the normal gaming state, and (C) this When the transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the CZ to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) via the preparation for ART.

Here, in the pachislot machine 1, the ART gaming state is basically the gaming state in which the ART is winning among the RT4 gaming states, and starts when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state after the ART winning. As shown in FIG. 35, the RT4 gaming state shifts from the RT0 to RT2 gaming states via the RT3 gaming state, so that the ART gaming state does not start immediately even after winning the ART. Absent. Therefore, the pachi-slot machine 1 is in the process of preparing for ART until it shifts to the RT4 gaming state after winning the ART, and notifies the stop operation necessary for shifting to the RT4 gaming state during the ART preparation.

Subsequently, the ART gaming state is basically the gaming state in which the ART is winning among the RT4 gaming states. As shown in FIG. 36, the ART gaming state is usually composed of ART and CT. The normal ART and the CT are gaming states in which the playability is different from each other, and the normal ART is for displaying a stop operation advantageous to the player (for example, a combination of symbols with a large number of medals to be paid out) during a predetermined number of games. It is a gaming state that notifies the stop operation of the player and the stop operation required to maintain the RT4 game state), and the CT notifies the player of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player and adds the duration of the normal ART. It is a gaming state that functions as a chance zone. During CT, the game is usually performed without digesting the duration of ART.

As shown in FIG. 36, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal ART to the CT or general gaming state. Specifically, in normal ART, a lottery for transition to CT is performed, and (D) When the lottery for transition is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from normal ART to CT. Further, the duration of the normal ART is managed. (E) When the duration ends, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal ART to the general gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ).
Normally, the method of managing the duration of ART is arbitrary, but in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the duration is managed according to the number of games. Of course, the duration may be managed not by the number of games but by the number of medals and the difference number that are normally paid out during ART, and the number of notifications that affect the payout of medals during normal ART (navigation). The duration may be managed by the number of times).

As shown in FIG. 36, there is a possibility of shifting from CT to normal ART. Specifically, the duration of the CT is managed, and (F) when the duration ends, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the CT to the normal ART. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the CT is managed by the duration of 8 games per set, which will be described in detail later (see FIG. 67).

Further, as shown in FIG. 36, the general gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ) and the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) may shift to the bonus state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35, (2) when the winning combination related to the bonus is won in the general gaming state and the ART gaming state, the main control board 71 is in the gaming state from the general gaming state or the ART gaming state to the bonus state. To migrate.

In the bonus state, a lottery for transition to ART is performed. (G) If the transition lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the general gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ). (However, if the transition from the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) to the bonus state has occurred, the main control board 71 will move from the bonus state to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) even if the transition lottery is not won. ) To shift the game state). Further, (H) When the transition lottery in the bonus state is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT). As described above, when the bonus state ends, the game state shifts to the RT1 game state. Therefore, when the game state shifts from the bonus state to the ART game state, the main control board 71 is preparing for ART. The game state is transferred to the ART game state via.

[Various data tables on the main control side]
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 94 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 79.

<Design arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 37 represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surfaces of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R by data. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between the 20 symbol positions "0" to "19" and the symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

The symbol positions "0" to "19" indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbol corresponding to the symbol positions "0" to "19" can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

The types of patterns are "White 7", "Blue 7", "Chile Top 1", "Chile Top 2", "Chile Bottom", "Replay", "Hat", "Cactus 1", "Cactus 2". And "Cactus 3" are included.

In the symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 37, when the reel index is detected, the symbol located in the middle of the display window 4 (the symbol passing through the middle of the display window 4) is assigned to the symbol position "0", and the reel 3L Correspondence relationships are defined in which symbol positions "0" to "19" are assigned to each of the 20 symbols in the order of movement in the rotation directions of 3, 3C, and 3R.

In this way, by using the middle stage of the display window 4 as a reference, the type of the symbol located in the middle stage of the display window 4 can be specified for each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

<Design code table>
Further, as shown in FIG. 37, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table and is distinguished by 1 byte (8 bits) of data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 37 represents a code for identifying the symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

The symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment are "white 7", "blue 7", "chili top 1", "chili top 2", "chili bottom", "replay", and "hat" as described above. , "Cactus 1", "Cactus 2" and "Cactus 3".

In the symbol code table, "00000001" is assigned as data to the "white 7" symbol (symbol code 1). "00000010" is assigned as data to the "blue 7" symbol (symbol code 2). "00000011" is assigned as data to the "Chile top 1" symbol (symbol code 3).

Similarly, for each symbol (symbol code 4-10) of "Chile top 2", "Chile bottom", "Replay", "Hat", "Cactus 1", "Cactus 2" and "Cactus 3". , "00000100" to "000001010" are assigned as data.

<Design combination table>
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 41. The symbol combination table is used when a combination of symbols predetermined according to the type of privilege, data stored in the main RAM 95 when the combination of the symbols is displayed, and the combination of the symbols are displayed. The correspondence with the benefits (number of medals paid out) is stipulated.

In the present embodiment, if the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line matches the combination of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, it is determined that the prize is won. Then, when it is determined that the prize is won, the player is given benefits such as paying out medals, operating the replay, and operating the bonus game (continuous differential device for the character). If the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line does not match any of the combinations of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, it is a so-called "missing". That is, in the present embodiment, the combination of the "missing" symbols is specified by not specifying the combination of the symbols corresponding to the "missing" in the symbol combination table. The present invention is not limited to this, and the item of "off" may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly specify "off".

The data column in the symbol combination table defines information for identifying the symbol combination displayed along the valid line. Specifically, in the data column, a "storage area" in which data of a combination of corresponding symbols is stored and "data (bits corresponding to the combination of symbols in 1-byte data)" stored in the storage area. Data for specifying) ”is specified. In the present embodiment, 22 1-byte storage areas are used to determine the combination of each symbol. For example, “C_BB1” shown in FIG. 38 is determined by storing 1 in bit 1 of the storage area 0.

The combination specified in the symbol combination table means the symbol combination of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R displayed along the effective line when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped. For each combination, the role of the combination and the combination name according to the type of the symbol constituting the combination are defined.

In addition, the number of medals to be paid out specified in the symbol combination table specifies the number of medals to be paid out when the corresponding combination of symbols is displayed. For example, referring to FIG. 40, when the combination name “C_9 sheets A_01” is displayed, nine medals will be paid out.

In addition, the content column in the symbol combination table indicates the role of each symbol combination and the characteristics of each symbol combination. With reference to FIG. 38, for example, the combination names “C_BB1” and “C_BB2” are a combination of symbols related to BB, and when displayed along the valid line, the gaming state shifts to the bonus state (see FIG. 35). ).

Further, the combination names "R_RT transition A_01" to "R_RT transition B_02" are bell spills. When a bell spill is displayed along the effective line, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state (see FIG. 35).

In addition, the combination names "C_maintenance lip A_01" to "C_maintenance lip G_01" are replays. The replay is a combination of symbols in which "replay-replay-replay" is displayed on any of the three lines of the bottom line, the top line, and the cross-down line displayed on the display window 4. When the replay is displayed along the valid line, the replay is activated.

The combination names "C_RT2 rip A_01" and "C_RT2 rip A_02" are RT2 transition rips. The RT2 transition lip is a combination of symbols in which "replay-replay-replay" is displayed on the cross-up line displayed in the display window 4. When the RT2 transition lip is displayed along the effective line, the re-game operation is performed and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state (see FIG. 35).

The combination name "C_RT3 lip_01" is an RT3 transition lip. The RT3 transition lip is a combination of symbols in which "replay-replay-replay" is displayed on the center line (effective line) displayed on the display window 4. When the RT3 transition lip is displayed along the effective line, the re-game operation is performed and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state (see FIG. 35).

Further, the combination names "C_RT4 rip A_01" to "C_RT4 rip D_02" are RT4 transition rips. When the RT4 transition lip is displayed along the effective line, the re-game operation is performed and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 35).

In addition, the combination names "C_chililip A_01" to "C_1 certain chili lip D_01" are chili lip. The chili lip is a combination of symbols in which the chili symbol is displayed on the display window 4. Here, as shown in FIG. 37, in the present embodiment, the symbol “upper chili 1” and the symbol “lower chili” are continuously arranged on each reel. The Chilean symbol is a name when the symbol "Chile top 1" and the symbol "Chile bottom" are regarded as one symbol. When the chili lip is displayed along the effective line, the re-game is activated.

In addition, among the chili lip, the combination name "C_chili lip A_01" is a combination of symbols in which the chili symbol is displayed only on one of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed on the display window 4. Sometimes called "single reel lip". In addition, among the chili lip, the combination names "C_chili lip B_01" and "C_chili lip C_01" are a combination of symbols whose chili symbols are displayed on two reels of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed on the display window 4. Yes, in the following, it may be called "double chili lip". In addition, among the chili lip, the combination names "C_chili lip D_01" to "C_1 certain chili lip D_01" are a combination of symbols in which the chili symbol is displayed on all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed on the display window 4 (or the said This is a combination of symbols displayed when the stop operation for displaying the combination of symbols fails (so-called a mistake in pressing a button), and may be referred to as a "triple reel" below.

Further, the combination names "C_reach eye lip A_01" to "C_reach eye lip P_02" are reach eye lip. The reach eye lip is a so-called reach eye, and is a combination of symbols in which a special combination of symbols is displayed on the display window 4. For example, the combination name "C_reach eye lip A_01" is a combination of symbols in which "white 7-white 7-white 7" is displayed along the top line. When the reach eye lip is displayed along the effective line, the re-game is activated.

In addition, the combination names "C_RB role A_01" to "C_RB role G_02" are the ninth in the BB. When the 9th BB roll is displayed along the valid line, 9 medals are paid out. In addition, among the 9th cards in the BB, the combination of symbols excluding the combination names "C_RB role C_01" and "C_RB role C_02" is 7 symbols (designs) in any of the 5 lines displayed on the display window 4. It is a combination of symbols in which three "white 7" or symbols "blue 7") are displayed side by side (or a combination of symbols displayed when the stop operation for displaying the combination of the symbols fails). In the following, it may be referred to as "7 sets in BB". On the other hand, the combination names "C_RB role C_01" and "C_RB role C_02" are a combination of symbols in which two 7 symbols are displayed side by side on any of the five lines, and are referred to as "7 in BB" below. I may call it.

Further, the combination names "C_9 sheets A_01" to "C_9 sheets H_04" are bells. The bell is a combination of symbols in which "hat-hat-hat" is displayed on any of the five lines displayed on the display window 4. When the bell is displayed along the valid line, 9 medals will be paid out.

In addition, the combination names "C_1st_A_01" to "C_2nd_B_04" are the first cards. When the first medal is displayed along the valid line, one medal is paid out. In addition, the combination names "C_SP1_01" and "C_SP2_01" are definite rolls. When a confirmed roll is displayed along the valid line, one medal is paid out.

Further, the combination names "C_3 sheets A_01" to "C_3 sheets F_01" are cacti. When the cactus is displayed along the valid line, three medals are paid out. Further, the combination names "C_weak 2 sheets A_01" to "C_weak 2 sheets B_03" are weak cherries, and the combination names "C_strong 2 sheets A_01" to "C_strong 2 sheets C_09" are strong cherries. When a weak cherry or a strong cherry is displayed along the valid line, two medals are paid out.

<Internal lottery table>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43, the internal lottery table referred to when determining the internal winning combination will be described. The internal lottery table is provided for each game state, and defines the lottery value information corresponding to each combination. FIG. 42 is an internal lottery table referred to in each of the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state, and FIG. 43 is an internal lottery table referenced in the RT5 gaming state or the bonus state.

In the present embodiment, the lottery random value extracted from the predetermined numerical range "0 to 65535" is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value corresponding to each combination, and whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative. An internal lottery is performed by determining (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred).

Therefore, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the winning combination to which this is assigned is determined as the internal winning combination. That is, the winning probability of each number can be expressed by "the lottery value corresponding to each number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (65536)".

In the internal lottery table, basically, the type of the winning combination and the winning probability related to the replay determined as the internal winning combination change according to the type of the RT gaming state. Comparing the internal lottery tables of the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state shown in FIG. 42, it can be seen that the types of winning combinations and the winning probabilities related to the replay determined as the internal winning combinations in each gaming state are different. As the most characteristic point, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, "F_chili lip (No. 25)" to "F_reach eye lip D (No. 31)" are internal in the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. It is not determined as a winning combination, but is determined as an internal winning combination only in the RT4 gaming state. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when "F_chili lip (No. 25)" to "F_reach eye lip D (No. 31)" are determined as internal winning combinations during the RT4 game state, specific control (described later). Flag conversion) is performed, but this specific control will be described later.

Even in the RT0 game state to the RT3 game state, "F_reach eye lip A to D" may be determined as an internal winning combination together with "F_BB1, 2" (No. 3 to 6, No.). (Refer to .15-18), "F_reach eye lip A to D" is not determined as an internal winning combination by itself. Therefore, when "F_reach eye lip A to D" is determined as an internal winning combination during the RT0 game state to the RT3 game state (from the player's point of view, the combination of symbols according to the "F_reach eye lip A to D" is (When displayed), the winning combination (F_BB1, 2) related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination at the same time.

Further, in the RT5 game state, which is a state between flags, the combination related to the bonus is carried over as an internal winning combination as described above. Therefore, in the internal lottery table in the RT5 game state shown in FIG. 43, the winning combination related to the carried-over bonus is always determined as the internal winning combination.

<Comparison table of internal winning combination and symbol combination>
FIGS. 44 to 49 are comparison tables showing the correspondence with the combination of symbols that can be displayed on the effective line in each internal winning combination when each combination is determined as the internal winning combination. The circles in each correspondence table indicate the combinations of symbols that can be displayed on the effective line in the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination.

In the pachislot machine 1, the main control board 71 has different stop controls depending on the internal winning combination and the gaming state, and when a predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the correspondence relationship shown in FIGS. 45 to 51 is shown. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped so that the combination of symbols can be displayed. In the correspondence table shown in FIGS. 45 to 51, all combinations of symbols that may be displayed when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination are listed, but the circles corresponding to the winning combinations are listed. Even a combination of symbols marked with may not be displayed.

That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the stop control (for example, the symbol to be preferentially pulled in) is made different according to the combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed and the current gaming state. Even a combination of marked symbols may not be displayed. Therefore, the correspondence relationship between the type of combination and the combination of the symbols that are actually stopped and displayed is shown in FIGS. 50 and 51.

<Correspondence between the winning combination during the non-flag and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped>
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship (some combinations are omitted) between the winning combination in the gaming state excluding the inter-flag state and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped. In the pachi-slot machine 1, as a plurality of combinations, a "push order combination" is provided, which is a combination in which the combinations of symbols displayed according to the order of stop operations (push order) are different. The combination of symbols associated with the "correct answer in the push order" in FIG. 50 is a combination of symbols that is advantageous for the player among the combinations of symbols displayed according to the push order, and corresponds to the "incorrect answer in the push order". The attached symbol combination is a combination of symbols that is disadvantageous to the player among the combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order. When notifying the stop operation which is advantageous for the player, the correct push order is notified, and as a result, the combination of symbols associated with the "push order correct answer" is displayed. Even in the ART game state, the push order that is an incorrect answer may be notified, but the details will be described later.

Here, in the present embodiment, the end of the name of the push order combination indicates the push order that is the correct answer.
Specifically, the trailing "1st" of the winning combination means that the correct push order is for the first stop operation on the left reel 3L, and the trailing "2nd" of the winning combination is The correct push order means that the first stop operation is for the reel 3C in the middle, and the last "3rd" in the name of the combination means that the correct push order is the reel whose first stop operation is on the right. It means that it is for 3R. Further, the end "123" of the role name means that the correct push order is "left, middle, right", and the end "132" of the role name means that the correct push order is "left". , Right, middle ", and the ending" 213 "of the role name means that the correct push order is" middle, left, right ", and the ending" 231 "of the role name. Means that the correct push order is "left, right, middle".

As shown in FIG. 50, the combination “F_chili lip” is a combination in which the combinations of symbols displayed are different according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, FIG. 44 of the chili lip (see FIG. 38). If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 49 is displayed along the valid line and the pressing order is not correct, the replays (see FIG. 38) are shown in FIGS. 44 to 49. One of the displayable symbol combinations shown is displayed along the valid line. In addition, referring to FIGS. 44 to 49, the combination "F_chili lip" cannot display the triple chili lip ("C_ chili lip D_01" to "C_1 certain chili lip D_01"), and the single chili lip or the double chili lip ("C_ chili lip"). It can be seen that only A_01, "C_Chillilip B_01", and "C_Chillilip C_01") can be displayed. That is, the role "F_chili lip" is a role in which the triple chili lip cannot be displayed.

In addition, the combinations "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the chili lip (see FIG. 38) is selected. If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 44 to 49 is displayed along the valid line and the pressing order is not correct, FIGS. 44 to 38 of the replay (see FIG. 38). Any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in 49 is displayed along the valid line. In addition, referring to FIGS. 44 to 49, it can be seen that the combinations “F_certain chili lip” and “F_1 certain chili lip” can display triple chili lip. That is, the combination "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are roles that can display triple chili lip.

In addition, the combinations "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the reach eye lip (reach eye lip () If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 44 to 49 of (see FIGS. 38 and 39) is displayed along the valid line and the pressing order is not correct, a replay (FIG. 38) is performed. 38), any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 44 to 49 is displayed along the effective line.

In addition, the order of pressing the correct answers in the roles "F_chili lip", "F_certain chili lip", "F_1 certain chili lip" and the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" may be arbitrary, but this implementation In the mode of, the push order in which the first stop operation is for the left reel 3L is set as the correct push order. Therefore, for example, in a game in which the combination "F_reach eye lip A" is determined as the internal winning combination, when the player performs the first stop operation on the left reel 3L, the reach eye lip is displayed. Will be done.

Further, for the combination "F_maintenance lip A" and "F_maintenance lip B", any combination of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 44 to 49 of the replays (see FIG. 38) is an effective line regardless of the pressing order. It is displayed along with. Further, the combinations "F_maintenance rip_1st" to "F_maintenance rip_3rd" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the replay (see FIG. 38). If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 44 to 49 is displayed along the valid line and the pressing order is not correct, the RT2 transition lip (see FIG. 38) Any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 44 to 49 is displayed along the valid line.

Further, the combinations "F_RT3 rip_1st" to "F_RT3 rip_3rd" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the RT3 transition rip (see FIG. 38). Is displayed along the valid line, and if the pressing order is not correct, one of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 44 to 49 in the replay (see FIG. 38) is displayed on the valid line. Displayed along.

Further, the combinations "F_RT4 rip_123" to "F_RT4 rip_3rd" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the RT4 transition rip (see FIG. 38). Is displayed along the valid line, and if the pressing order is not correct, one of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 44 to 49 in the replay (see FIG. 38) is displayed on the valid line. Displayed along.

Further, the combinations "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd" are combinations in which the combinations of symbols displayed are different according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the bell (see FIG. 40). Is displayed along the valid line, and if the pressing order is not correct, a bell spill (see FIG. 38) or a first roll (see FIGS. 40 and 41) is displayed.

Further, for the combination "F_common bell", any combination of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 44 to 49 of the bells (see FIG. 40) is displayed along the effective line regardless of the pressing order. Further, for the combinations "F_sabo 1" and "F_sabo 2", any combination of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 44 to 49 of the cacti (see FIG. 41) is along the effective line regardless of the pressing order. Is displayed.

Further, for the combination "weak chili", any combination of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 44 to 49 of the weak cherries (see FIG. 41) is displayed along the effective line regardless of the pressing order. Further, for the roles "F_strong chili 1" and "F_strong chili 2", any combination of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 44 to 49 of the strong cherries (see FIG. 41) is effective regardless of the pressing order. Displayed along the line.

<Correspondence between the winning combination between the flags and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped>
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination in the inter-flag state and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped (some combinations are omitted), and in particular, BB (“C_BB1”) during the inter-flag state. "C_BB2") can be displayed. In "whether or not BB is established" in FIG. 51, "○" indicates that BB can be displayed, and "x" indicates that BB cannot be displayed.

If the BB cannot be displayed, a combination of symbols corresponding to a combination other than the combination related to the bonus determined as the internal winning combination will be displayed. The combination of symbols displayed according to the combination other than the combination related to this bonus is as shown in FIG. For example, in the combination "F_BB1 + F_chilip", the BB cannot be displayed, and the combination of the corresponding symbols shown in the combination "F_chilip" in FIG. 50 is displayed. In this case, during the inter-flag state, only the combination of symbols displayed when the push order is correct may be displayed, or only the combination of symbols displayed when the push order is incorrect may be displayed. It may be.

For example, since the BB cannot be displayed in the combination "F_BB1 + F_3 selection bell_1st", the combination of the corresponding symbols shown in the combination "F_3 selection bell_1st" in FIG. 50 is displayed. It is possible to display only the bell displayed when the push order is correct, and to make it impossible to display the bell spilled stitch or the first roll displayed when the push order is incorrect. Further, in the case of the combination "F_BB1 + F_RT3 rip_1st", only the replay displayed when the push order is incorrect may be displayed, and the RT3 transition rip displayed when the push order is correct may not be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 51, in the inter-flag state, when the combination related to the bonus and any of "missing", "F_special 1", "F_special 2", and "F_special 3" are determined as the internal winning combination, BB can be displayed.

<Abbreviation for the winning role>
The correspondence between the winning combination and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped has been described above. Next, the data table used when performing various lottery in the general game state, the ART game state, etc. will be described. In the following, the winning combination used when referring to the data table is represented by an abbreviation, so that the data table is used. Before the explanation of, the abbreviation of the winning role will be explained. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an abbreviation for the winning combination.

As shown in FIG. 52 (A), in the following, the combinations "F_BB1" and "F_BB2" are referred to as the combination "BB", and the combinations "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd" are referred to as the combination "push order bell". The role "F_common bell" is called the role "common bell", the roles "F_sabo 1" and "F_sabo 2" are called the role "cactus", the role "F_weak chili" is called the role "weak cherry", and the role "F_strong" "Chile 1" and "F_strong Chile 2" are called the role "strong cherry".

In addition, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are called "triple chili lip" when they win the flag conversion lottery, and are called "replay" when they do not win the flag conversion lottery. Similarly, the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are called the role "reach eye lip" when they win the flag conversion lottery, and are called "replay" when they do not win the flag conversion lottery.

(Flag conversion lottery)
Here, the flag conversion lottery will be described with reference to FIG. 52 (B). In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, any one of the roles "F_certain chili lip", "F_1 certain chili lip", "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" independently wins the role during the RT4 game state. If it is determined as, a flag conversion lottery is performed. Then, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege (for example, addition of the number of ART games or CT winning) is given.

As shown in FIG. 50, for the combinations "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip", the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" is displayed when the push order is correct, and the combination of the symbols of "replay" is displayed when the push order is incorrect. Is displayed. In the pachislot machine 1, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the combination "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are treated as the role "triple chili lip", and information for displaying the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip". (For example, push forward to aim at the Chilean pattern)
.. On the other hand, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are treated as the role "replay", and information for displaying the combination of the symbols of "replay" is notified (for example). , Notifies the push order other than forward push).

Similarly, for the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D", the combination of the symbols of "reach eye lip" is displayed when the push order is correct, and the combination of the symbols of "replay" is displayed when the push order is incorrect. Is displayed. In the pachislot machine 1, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are treated as the role "reach eye lip", and the combination of the symbols of "reach eye lip" is treated. Notify the information to be displayed (for example, push forward to aim at the symbol "white 7"). On the other hand, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are treated as the role "replay", and the information for displaying the combination of the symbols of "replay". Is notified.

By performing the stop operation in accordance with this notification, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" or "reach eye lip" is displayed, and a special privilege is given. From the pachislot machine 1, special benefits are given according to the winning of the flag conversion lottery, but from the player's point of view, the special benefits are displayed because the combination of the "triple chili lip" symbols is displayed. You will feel that you have been granted.

In order to enhance the playability of the pachislot machine, it may be preferable that the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to which the privilege is given is different depending on the state rather than being constant. Since the stop control (combination of displayed symbols) differs depending on the type of internal winning combination, the winning probability of the winning combination is different as a method of changing the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to which the privilege is given depending on the state. A method is also conceivable (in the pachislot machine 1, the winning probability of the winning combination can be different depending on whether or not the bonus is activated and the RT gaming state. Therefore, for example, only the RT4 gaming state is used as the gaming state corresponding to the ART gaming state. Instead, a method of providing other gaming states such as RT6 gaming state and RT7 gaming state is also conceivable). However, since the triggers for different winning probabilities of the winning combination (triggers for shifting the RT gaming state) are limited, this method lacks flexibility.

Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to the internal lottery for determining the internal winning combination, the flag conversion lottery and the notification based on the lottery result are performed without changing the winning probability of the winning combination. The frequency of appearance of the combination of symbols to which is given can be flexibly different depending on the state. That is, in a state where it is easy to win the flag conversion lottery, the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to which the privilege is given can be increased, and conversely, when it is difficult to win the flag conversion lottery, the combination of symbols to which the privilege is given can be increased. Can reduce the frequency of appearance.

In the following, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" will be referred to as "triple" in the flag conversion lottery when the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as internal winning roles. It is sometimes referred to as converting to "chili lip" (or simply converting to "triple chili lip"), and when the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are determined as internal winning roles. Winning the flag conversion lottery of is called converting the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" to "reach eye lip" (or simply converting to "reach eye lip"). There is.

<Sub-flag conversion table>
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control board 71 cannot directly send the internal winning combination to the sub-control circuit 101 due to regulations. Therefore, the main control board 71 is internally based on the sub-flag conversion table as shown in FIG. 53. A sub-flag that groups the winning combinations is added to the start command and sent.

In the sub-flag conversion table as shown in FIG. 53, "missing" as an internal winning combination is associated with "0" as a sub-flag indicating "loss". "F_chili lip" as an internal winning combination is associated with "1" as a sub-flag indicating "double chili".

"F_certain chili lip" as an internal winning combination is associated with "2" as a sub-flag indicating "triple chili A". The “F_1 certainty chili lip” as the internal winning combination is associated with “3” as a sub-flag indicating “triple chili B”.

"F_reach eye lip A" as an internal winning combination is associated with "4" as a sub flag indicating "reach eye lip 1". "F_reach eye lip B" as an internal winning combination is associated with "5" as a sub flag indicating "reach eye lip 2".

"F_reach eye lip C" as an internal winning combination is associated with "6" as a sub flag indicating "reach eye lip 3". "F_reach eye lip D" as an internal winning combination is associated with "7" as a sub flag indicating "reach eye lip 4".

"F_maintenance lip A" and "F_maintenance lip B" as internal winning combinations are associated with "8" as sub-flags indicating "replay". "F_maintenance lip_1st", "F_maintenance lip_2nd" and "F_maintenance lip_3rd" as internal winning combinations are associated with "9" as sub-flags indicating "push order lip 1".

"F_RT3 rip_1st", "F_RT3 rip_213", "F_RT3 rip_231" and "F_RT3 rip_3rd" as internal winning combinations are associated with "10" as sub-flags indicating "push order rip 2".

"F_RT4 rip_123", "F_RT4 rip_132", "F_RT4 rip_2nd" and "F_RT4 rip_3rd" as internal winning combinations are associated with "11" as sub-flags indicating "push order rip 3".

"F_3 choice bell_1st", "F_3 choice bell_2nd" and "F_3 choice bell_3rd" as internal winning combinations are associated with "12" as sub-flags indicating "push order bell". "F_common bell" as an internal winning combination is associated with "13" as a sub-flag indicating "common bell".

"F_Sabo 1", "F_Sabo 2", "F_RB role 1", "F_RB role 2", "F_RB role 3", and "F_RB role 4" as internal winning roles are "cactus" as sub-flags indicating "cactus". It is associated with "14".

“F_weak chili” as an internal winning combination is associated with “15” as a sub-flag indicating “weak chili”. “F_strong chili 1” and “F_strong chili 2” as internal winning combinations are associated with “16” as sub-flags indicating “strong chili”.

"F_special 1" and "F_special 2" as internal winning combinations are associated with "17" as sub-flags indicating "reach 1". "F_special 3" as an internal winning combination is associated with "18" as a sub-flag indicating "reach eye 2".

[Flow of the game during the general game state]
Subsequently, the flow of the game during the general game state will be described with reference to FIG. 54. In the pachislot machine 1, the normal gaming state in the general gaming state is shifted to the CZ in the general gaming state, and then the CZ in the general gaming state is shifted to the ART gaming state, so that the general gaming state (non-ART) is changed to the ART gaming state. (See FIG. 36). FIG. 54 (A) is a diagram showing the flow of the game when shifting from the normal gaming state in the general gaming state to the CZ in the general gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 54 (A), the normal gaming state has a low probability state and a high probability state as a lottery state of CZ. The low-probability state and the high-probability state are states in which the expectation of winning the CZ lottery performed during the normal game state is different, the low-probability state is difficult to win the CZ lottery, and the high-probability state is the CZ lottery. It is in a state where it is easy to do. If the CZ lottery performed during the normal game state is won, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the CZ (see FIG. 36).

The pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of chance zones of CZ1, CZ2 and CZ3 as CZs (chance zones). These CZ1 to CZ3 are chance zones having different expectations for winning the ART lottery performed during the CZ, CZ3 is a chance zone to win the ART lottery without fail, and CZ1 and CZ2 are the ART lottery with a predetermined probability. It is a chance zone to win. In the CZ lottery performed during the normal game state, the CZ transitioning from the normal game state is drawn from these CZ1 to CZ3.

Subsequently, FIG. 54 (B) is a diagram showing the flow of the game when shifting from the general gaming state CZ1 and CZ2 to the ART gaming state. CZ1 and CZ2 are composed of a first half portion and a second half portion. The first half is a period for promoting ranks having different expectations for winning the ART lottery performed during CZ, and the second half is a period for notifying the lottery result of the ART lottery based on the rank by a battle effect.

During CZ1, 6 levels of modes are used as ranks, and the higher the mode, the higher the expectation of winning the ART lottery. The first half of CZ1 continues the first number of games (for example, 12 games at the maximum), and the mode promotion lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination. Then, the ART lottery is performed based on the mode promoted in the first half of the first game of the second half of CZ1.

In addition, during CZ2, points of 10 levels are used as ranks, and the higher the points, the higher the expectation of winning the ART lottery. In the first half of CZ2, the second number of games (for example, up to 15 games) is continued, and points are promoted by lottery based on the internal winning combination. Then, the ART lottery is performed based on the points promoted in the first half of the first game of the second half of CZ2.

In the latter half of CZ1, a battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character A play against each other is performed, and in the latter half of CZ2, a battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character B play against each other is performed. This battle production continues for the third number of games (for example, up to 4 games), and the victory or defeat is managed based on the result of the ART lottery. If the ART lottery is won, the ally character wins and is not won. If so, the enemy character wins. Further, in the latter half of CZ1 and CZ2, an ART lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination in each game, and when the ART lottery is won, the result of the battle effect is rewritten. That is, when a so-called rare role is determined as an internal winning role during the battle production, an ART lottery is performed and the result of the battle production is rewritten based on the result.

In CZ1 and CZ2, if the ART is not won, the player is defeated in the battle effect in the latter half, and basically, the game state shifts to the normal game state after that. On the other hand, in CZ1 and CZ2, when the ART is won, the battle effect in the latter half is won, and then the game state shifts to the normal ART via the preparation for the ART. In the first half of CZ1 and CZ2, a freeze may occur. In this case, the game state shifts to CT (additional chance zone) instead of normal ART (via during ART preparation).

Subsequently, FIG. 54 (C) is a diagram showing the flow of the game when shifting from the CZ3 in the general game state to the ART game state. CZ3 continues the fourth number of games (for example, 17 games at the maximum), and ART lottery is performed every game based on the internal winning combination. CZ3 ends when the ART lottery is won, and from the next game, the game state shifts to CT (additional chance zone) via ART preparation. Further, in CZ3, a freeze may occur, and even in this case, the game state shifts to CT (additional chance zone) from the next game via ART preparation. On the other hand, when the number of the fourth game elapses without winning the ART lottery in CZ3, the game state shifts to the normal ART via the preparation for ART. That is, CZ3 is a chance zone in which the transition to the ART gaming state is confirmed at the time of transition.

[Data table used during general game state]
Subsequently, the data table used during the general gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 60.

<Normal medium and high probability lottery table>
FIG. 55 is a normal medium-high probability lottery table used for the transition lottery of the CZ lottery state (low probability and high probability). In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lottery state of CZ is changed based on the internal winning combination, and the lottery state of CZ is also changed at the end of the bonus and the end of CZ and ART. FIG. 55 (A) is a normal medium-high probability lottery table used when shifting the lottery state of CZ based on the internal winning combination, and is referred to every game during the normal game state. Further, FIG. 55B is a normal medium-high probability lottery table used when shifting the lottery state of CZ at the end of the bonus, and is referred to at the time of setting change, the end of the bonus, or the end of CZ, ART.

The normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 55 (A) defines information on the lottery value for the CZ lottery state after the transition in association with the current CZ lottery state and the winning combination.

In the various data tables shown below, the lottery value information is conceptually shown. In the figure, "0" means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability "0%" is defined, and "extremely low" means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability "0% to less than 1%" is defined. It means that it is specified, "extremely low" means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability "1% to less than 10%" is specified, and "low" means a lottery probability "10%". It means that the lottery value corresponding to "~ 30% or less" is specified, and "medium" means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability "30% to less than 60%" is specified. "High" means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability "60% to less than 80%" is defined, and "extremely high" means a lottery corresponding to a lottery probability "80% to less than 99%". It means that the value is specified, "extremely high" means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability "99% to less than 100%" is specified, and "confirmed" means the lottery probability " It means that the lottery value corresponding to "100%" is specified.

Then, in the various data tables shown below, the data is extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (“0 to 255” when the probability denominator is 256, “0 to 65535” when the probability denominator is 65536). The random number value for lottery is sequentially subtracted by the specified lottery value, and whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred) is determined, so that the internal lottery is performed. Will be.

With reference to the normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 55 (A), it can be seen that when the current CZ lottery state has a low probability, it is easy to shift to a high probability when the weak cherry is an internal winning combination. .. In addition, when the current CZ lottery state has a high probability, it can be seen that the high probability is maintained by determining any of the common bell, cactus, weak cherry, and strong cherry as the internal winning combination. ..

The normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 55 (B) defines the lottery value information about the lottery state of the CZ after the transition according to the situation at the time of reference. With reference to the normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 55 (B), it can be seen that the lottery state of CZ always shifts to a high probability at the end of the bonus.

<CZ lottery table>
FIG. 56 is a CZ lottery table used for CZ lottery, and FIG. 56 (A) is a CZ lottery table used when performing a CZ lottery based on an internal winning combination during a normal game state. B) is a CZ lottery table used when performing a CZ lottery as to whether or not to pull back the CZ when the CZ fails or when the ART ends.

The CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 56 (A) defines information on lottery values related to winning / non-winning of CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3 in association with the current lottery state of CZ and the internal winning combination. With reference to the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 56 (A), it can be seen that when the current CZ lottery state is in the high probability, the probability of winning the CZ lottery is higher than in the case of the low probability.

The CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 56 (B) defines lottery value information regarding winning / non-winning of CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3. When CZ fails (when the ART lottery in CZ1 and CZ2 is not won)
At the end of the ART game state, the CZ pullback lottery is performed using the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 56 (B).

<CZ1 medium mode up lottery table>
FIG. 57 is a CZ1 medium mode-up lottery table used for the mode-up lottery of CZ1 in the first half of CZ1. The mode-up lottery table in CZ1 defines the lottery value information about the result of the mode-up lottery in association with the current mode and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 59 (A) described later, in CZ1, the probability of winning the ART lottery increases as the mode increases, and when the mode increases to 6, the ART lottery is always won. The lottery result "mode 1 UP" means that the mode of CZ1 is increased by 1, and the lottery result "mode 2 UP" means that the mode of CZ1 is increased by 2. That is, if the current mode is "2" and the "mode 2 UP" is won, the mode of CZ1 will increase from "2" to "4". In addition, when the lottery result "mode 6 UP_freeze occurs" is won, a freeze occurs, and the ART lottery is won and CT is given.

<CZ2 medium point lottery table>
FIG. 58 is a CZ2 middle point lottery table used for the CZ2 point-up lottery in the first half of the CZ2. The CZ2 middle point lottery table defines the lottery value information about the result of the point-up lottery in association with the current points and the internal winning combination.
As shown in FIG. 59 (B) described later, in CZ2, the probability of winning the ART lottery increases as the points increase, and when the points increase to 10, the ART lottery is always won. In addition, "point 2UP" of the lottery result means that the point of CZ2 is increased by 2, for example, in the situation where the current point is "2", if "point 2UP" is won, the point of CZ2 is "point 2UP". It will go up from "2" to "4". In addition, when the lottery result "point 10UP_freeze occurs" is won, a freeze occurs, and the ART lottery is won and CT is given.

<ART lottery table in CZ>
59 and 60 are an ART lottery table in CZ used for ART lottery in CZ, and FIG. 59 (A) is an ART lottery table in CZ (for CZ1) used in the first game of the latter half of CZ1. FIG. 59 (B) is an ART lottery table (for CZ2) in CZ used in the first game of the latter half of CZ2, and FIG. 59 (C) is a CZ used in the latter half of CZ1 and CZ2. It is a medium ART lottery table (common to CZ1 and CZ2 for the latter half of the battle), and FIG. 59 (D) is a CZ medium ART lottery table (for CZ3) used for ART lottery in CZ3.

The ART lottery table (for CZ1) in CZ shown in FIG. 59 (A) defines the lottery value information regarding the presence or absence of the winning of the ART lottery in association with the current mode. Further, the ART lottery table (for CZ2) in CZ shown in FIG. 59B defines information on the lottery value as to whether or not the ART lottery is won in association with the current points. With reference to the ART lottery table in CZ (for CZ1) and the ART lottery table in CZ (for CZ2), it can be seen that in CZ1 and CZ2, the higher the rank (mode or point) of the first half, the easier it is to win the ART lottery.

The ART lottery table in CZ (common to CZ1 and CZ2 for the latter half of the battle) shown in FIG. 59 (C) defines the lottery value information regarding the presence or absence of the winning of the ART lottery in association with the internal winning combination. With reference to the ART lottery table in CZ (common to CZ1 and CZ2 for the latter half of the battle), if a rare role (weak cherry, cactus or strong cherry) is determined as an internal winning role in the latter half of CZ1 and CZ2, It can be seen that there is a probability of winning the ART lottery.

The ART lottery table (for CZ3) in CZ shown in FIG. 60 (D) defines information on the lottery value regarding the presence or absence of the winning of the ART lottery in association with the number of continuous games of CZ3 and the internal winning combination. If you refer to the ART lottery table in CZ (for CZ3), you can see that if you win the ART lottery in CZ3, you will always win the CT.

[Flow of games during normal ART]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 61, the flow of the game during the normal ART will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 usually has ART and CT as ART game states (see FIG. 36), and the CT is used as an additional chance zone. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, the game is normally performed with the aim of shifting to CT during ART. FIG. 61 (A) is a diagram showing a flow of a lottery for transition to CT during normal ART.

As shown in FIG. 61 (A), the pachislot machine 1 has an ART level and a CT lottery state as states that affect various lottery normally performed during ART. The ART level is provided in four stages of level 1 to level 4, and is mainly controlled based on the number of continuous games during normal ART. Then, the ART level affects the determination of the CT lottery state and the flag conversion lottery during the normal ART described later. In addition, the CT lottery state is provided in four stages of low probability, normal, high probability, and ultra-high probability, and is controlled mainly based on the ART level and the internal winning combination during normal ART. Then, the CT lottery state affects the CT lottery performed during the normal ART and the flag conversion lottery during the normal ART described later.

(Flag conversion during normal ART)
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the roles “F_certain chili lip”, “F_1 certain chili lip”, “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach” are used during the RT4 game state (that is, during the ART game state). When any one of "Eye Lip D" is independently determined as an internal winning combination, a flag conversion lottery is performed, and a special privilege (for example, an addition of the number of ART games or a CT winning) is given according to the lottery result. FIG. 61 (B) is a diagram showing a flag lottery method during normal ART.

As shown in FIG. 61 (B), the pachislot machine 1 normally performs a flag conversion lottery by referring to the ART level and the CT lottery state during ART. As a result, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege is given, and a notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "triple chili lip" and the combination of the symbols of the "reach eye lip" (for example, in order). Notification to aim at a predetermined pattern by pressing) is performed. On the contrary, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of "replay" (for example, the notification of the push order other than the forward push) is performed. When the player performs a stop operation according to this notification, a combination of symbols according to the notification content, that is, a combination of symbols of "triple chili lip" or a symbol of "reach eye lip" when the flag conversion lottery is won. The combination of symbols is displayed, and if the flag conversion lottery is not won, the combination of "replay" symbols is displayed.

[Data table normally used during ART]
Subsequently, a data table normally used during ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 66.

<Flag conversion lottery table during ART>
FIG. 62 is an ART flag conversion lottery table that is normally used for a flag conversion lottery during ART. In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the flag conversion lottery during normal ART is performed in two stages. Specifically, when the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as the internal winning combination, the first-stage flag conversion lottery is first performed, and when the first-stage flag conversion lottery is won, After that, the second stage flag conversion lottery is performed. Then, when the second stage flag conversion lottery is won, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are converted into "triple chili lip", and the first stage flag conversion lottery or the second stage flag conversion lottery. If it is not won, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are treated as "replay" without being converted into "triple chili lip".

FIG. 62 (A) is an ART flag conversion lottery table used for the first stage flag conversion lottery, and FIG. 62 (B) is an ART flag conversion lottery table used for the second stage flag conversion lottery. is there. The flag conversion lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 62 (A) defines the lottery value information for the lottery result of the first stage flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination. In the pachislot machine 1, the first-stage flag conversion lottery is performed only for the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip", and for the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D". Only the second stage flag conversion lottery is performed.

The flag conversion lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 62B defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the second stage flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination, the ART level, and the CT lottery state. In addition, until the CT is won once in the normal ART, the "first time (until the CT is won once)" column of the item "ART level" is referred to.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 62 (A) and 62 (B), in each of the flag conversion lottery tables during ART, the random values (0 to 255) in the range of the probability denominator 256 are used in the first and second stages. Since the flag conversion lottery is performed, the two-step flag conversion lottery can be imitated as a lottery performed using random values in the range of the probability denominator 65536. In recent pachislot machines, the main side is required to perform lottery (ART lottery, etc.) related to ball ejection, which was conventionally performed on the sub side, but the capacity of the storage means (ROM) on the main side is limited. Therefore, there is a need for a mechanism that enables lottery without impairing playability while suppressing the capacity.

In this respect, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention, by performing the probability denominator 256 in two stages, the probability denominator 65536 can be drawn, so that the capacity can be suppressed. In addition, by referring to the ART level and the CT lottery state for the second stage lottery, it is possible to perform a flag conversion lottery according to the current state as well as the internal winning combination, so that various playability can be achieved. You can perform a flag conversion lottery with you.

<ART level determination table>
FIG. 63 is an ART level determination table used to determine the ART level. The determination of the ART level is performed at the time of winning the ART when the transition to the ART gaming state is decided, and during the normal ART. FIG. 63 (A) is an ART level determination table for determining the ART level at the time of winning the ART, and FIG. 63 (B) is an ART level determination table for determining the ART level during normal ART.

The ART level determination table shown in FIG. 63 (A) defines lottery value information for each ART level. If a freeze has occurred at the time of winning the ART (see FIG. 57 and the like), the ART level 2 is determined as the ART level. The ART level determination table shown in FIG. 63B defines information on the lottery value for the destination ART level in association with the current ART level and the number of continuous games during normal ART. Further, the ART level determination table shown in FIG. 63B defines information on the lottery value for the destination ART level in association with the current ART level and the number of continuous games during normal ART at the time of CT entry. .. That is, during normal ART, the ART level shifts according to the number of continuous games, and the ART level shifts even at the timing when the normal ART enters the CT.

<Normal ART medium and high probability lottery table>
FIG. 64 is a normal ART medium-high probability lottery table for drawing a CT lottery state during normal ART. The normal ART medium-high probability lottery table defines the lottery value information for the CT lottery state of the migration destination in association with the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination. If you refer to the normal ART medium- and high-probability lottery table, you can see the role "Triple Chili Lip" (role "F_Probability Chili Lip""F_1 Probability Chili Lip" winning the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning) "and the role" Reach Eye Lip It can be seen that in "A" to "F_reach eye lip D" (winning the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning) ", the CT lottery state is likely to shift (fall) to" low probability ". In the above explanation, if the flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege is given. Therefore, it seems that the CT lottery state is likely to fall, which is contrary to the above explanation. As will be described later in, the roles "triple chili lip" and "reach eye lip" are always won in the CT lottery. Therefore, even if the CT lottery state falls, the special privilege of CT winning is still given.

<CT lottery table during ART>
FIG. 65 is a CT lottery table during ART which is usually used for CT lottery during ART. The CT lottery table during ART defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the CT lottery in association with the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination. In the CT lottery table during ART, if "cactus", "weak cherry", "strong cherry", "triple chili lip", "reach eye lip", and "BB" are determined as internal winning roles, the range of probability denominator 256 CT lottery is performed using random values. On the other hand, when other combinations (for example, replay, common bell, push order bell, etc.) are determined as the internal winning combination, CT lottery is performed using random values in the range of the probability denominator 65536.

The pachislot machine 1 has "normal CT" and "high accuracy CT" as CTs. The expectation of the number of ART games to be added during CT (additional chance zone) differs between "normal CT" and "high accuracy CT", and "high accuracy CT" has a larger number of ART games than "normal CT". Is easy to add (see FIG. 70).

<Additional lottery table during normal ART>
FIG. 66 is a normal ART extra lottery table used for an extra lottery to add the number of ART games during the normal ART. Normally, the additional lottery table during ART defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the additional lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

[Flow of games during CT]
Subsequently, the flow of the game during CT will be described with reference to FIG. 67. As shown in FIG. 67 (A), in the pachislot machine 1, CT is performed by playing eight times in one set. During CT, the number of ART games is added to the lottery based on the internal winning combination, and the number of games is not subtracted when the additional lottery is won, and the number of games is subtracted only when the additional lottery is not won. Will be done. Therefore, during CT, the game in which the number of ART games is added does not end, and the game in which the number of ART games is not added is performed eight times in the same set.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 67 (A) and 67 (B), when the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during CT (that is, when the winning combination "F_certain chili lip" or "F_1 certain chili lip" is won, the flag conversion lottery is won. ), 8 games per set are reset. For example, if a game in which the number of ART games is not added is played 7 times in the same set, and if a game in which the number of ART games is not added is played once more, the CT will end, but the role "triple chili lip" If this is won, the CT will be reset, and as a result, the CT will not end until a game in which the number of ART games is not added is performed eight times. Therefore, the CT becomes easier to continue as the role "triple chili lip" is won.

(Flag conversion during CT)
FIG. 67 (C) is a diagram showing a flag lottery method during CT. During CT, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are always converted to the role "triple chili lip". As described above, if the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during CT, the CT is reset. Therefore, when the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as the internal winning combination, the CT is reset. It will be set.

On the other hand, for the combinations "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D", the winning probability of the flag conversion lottery is controlled based on the three-stage table (tables 0 to 2). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), Table 0 has the lowest probability of being converted to "reach-eye lip", Table 1 has the next lowest probability of being converted to "reach-eye lip", and Table 2 Is most likely to be converted to a "reach eye lip". If the role "reach eye lip" is won during CT, CT is newly assigned as shown in FIG. 71 described later.

As shown in FIG. 67 (C), in normal CT, the table is determined based on the ART level. Further, in high-probability CT, table 0 is always determined regardless of the ART level.

[Data table used during CT]
Subsequently, the data table used during CT will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 71.

<Table during CT lottery table>
FIG. 68 is a CT table lottery table for determining a table to be used for the flag conversion lottery from the three-stage table. The table during CT lottery table defines the lottery value information of the table used for the flag conversion lottery in association with the state such as the ART level and the type of CT to be executed from now on. The table during CT lottery table is referred to at the start of CT when it is decided to win the CT lottery and shift to CT, and determines the table to be used for the flag conversion lottery during CT.

<Flag conversion lottery table during CT>
FIG. 69 is a CT flag conversion lottery table used for the flag conversion lottery during CT. The flag conversion lottery table during CT defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the table used for the flag conversion lottery and the internal winning combination. With reference to the CT flag conversion lottery table, it can be seen that the combination "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are always converted to the combination "triple chili lip" during CT.

<Additional lottery table during CT>
FIG. 70 is a CT additional lottery table used for an additional lottery for adding the number of ART games during CT. The additional lottery table during CT defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the additional lottery in association with the internal winning combination. It should be noted that the winning combination other than the winning combination shown in FIG. 70 is not won in the additional lottery during CT.

In addition, in the additional lottery during normal CT, the number of additional games varies depending on the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won. Specifically, when the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT is "1 to 8 times", it is easy to determine "10 games" as the number of additional games, and during the same CT. When the number of times the role "triple chili lip" is won is "9 to 16 times", it is easy to determine "20 games" as the number of additional games, and the number of times the role "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT. When is "17 to 24 times", it is easy to determine "30 games" as the number of additional games, and when the number of times the winning role "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT is "25 times or more". , "50 games" is easily determined as the number of additional games.

More specifically, in the additional lottery table during CT, when the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT is "1 to 8 times", the role "triple chili lip" in the figure is used. The number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value "extremely high" is "10 games", and the number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value "extremely low" is "20 games". Then, when the number of times the role "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT becomes "9 times or more", the number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value "extremely high" of the role "triple chili lip" in the figure becomes " Promoted to "20 games". Furthermore, when the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT is "17 times or more", it corresponds to the lottery values "extremely high" and "extremely low" of the role "triple chili lip" in the figure. The number of additional games is promoted to "30 games". Similarly, when the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT is "25 times or more", the lottery values "extremely high" and "extremely low" of the role "triple chili lip" in the figure are supported. The number of additional games to be played is promoted to "50 games".

In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of games to be added per game is increased according to the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during CT. As mentioned above, as long as the number of ART games is added, the CT will not end, and if the role "triple chili lip" is won, the CT will be reset. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the CT It is possible to expect that the amount of addition per time will increase as the number of times continues, and the interest during CT will improve.
In addition, since the number of times that triggers the increase in the amount of addition per time is more than the number of games (8 times) for one set of CT (9 times or more), an excessive profit is given to the player. It is possible to prevent the giving, and to balance the profits of the player and the game store.

<Lottery table with additional sets during CT>
FIG. 71 is a lottery table for adding the number of sets during CT, which is used for the lottery for adding the number of sets for which a new CT is given during CT. The lottery table for adding the number of sets during CT defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the lottery for adding the number of sets in association with the type of CT being executed and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 71, when the winning combination "reach eye lip" is won during CT, a new CT is given. When a new CT is assigned due to the lottery with the number of sets added, the new CT is started again at the timing when the CT being executed is completed.

It should be noted that the number of times the above-mentioned combination "triple chili lip" is won is counted only during the same CT, but this "during the same CT" is when the number of sets added during the CT is added to the lottery. It may or may not include the new CT given to.

[Flow of games during bonus state]
Subsequently, the flow of the game in the bonus state will be described with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 (A) is a diagram showing the flow of the game when the game shifts to the bonus state during the general gaming state (ART non-winning), and FIG. 72 (B) shows the case where the bonus state shifts to the normal ART. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game, and FIG. 72C is a figure which shows the flow of the game when it shifts to the bonus state during CT. As shown in FIGS. 72 (A) to 72 (C), the pachislot machine 1 has a normal BB and a special BB as bonus types, and determines the bonus type when the bonus state shifts. At this time, if the special BB is determined, after the end of the bonus state, the process shifts to CT via ART preparation. On the other hand, when the normal BB is determined, the flow will be different depending on the state before the transition to the bonus state.

With reference to FIG. 72 (A), when the game shifts from the general gaming state to the normal BB, an ART lottery is performed during the normal BB based on the internal winning combination. If you win this ART lottery, after the bonus state ends, you will shift to normal ART via ART preparation. After winning the ART lottery, the number of ART games will be added to the lottery during the bonus state.

With reference to FIG. 72 (B), when the transition from the normal ART to the normal BB is performed, a CT lottery is performed at the end of the normal BB. This CT lottery has a 50% chance of winning, and if it wins, it shifts to CT via ART preparation after the end of the bonus state, and if it does not win, it shifts to normal ART via ART preparation after the end of the bonus state. To do. In addition, during the bonus state after shifting from the normal ART, an additional lottery for the number of ART games is also performed.

With reference to FIG. 72 (C), when the CT shifts to the normal BB or the special BB, the shift to the CT is performed via the preparation for ART after the end of the bonus state. In addition, during the bonus state after shifting from the normal ART, an additional lottery for the number of ART games is also performed.

[Data table used during bonus status]
Subsequently, the data table used during the bonus state will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75.

<Bonus type lottery table>
FIG. 73 is a bonus type lottery table for determining a bonus type (normal BB, special BB). The bonus type lottery table is referred to at the start of the bonus state, and defines the lottery value information for the bonus type in association with the state before the transition to the bonus state.

<Bonus lottery table with the number of ART games added>
FIG. 74 is a bonus lottery table for adding the number of ART games used in the lottery for adding the number of ART games and the lottery for adding the number of ART games performed during the bonus state. The lottery table for adding the number of ART games in the bonus defines information on the lottery result of the ART lottery and the lottery value for the number of additional games in association with the bonus type and the internal winning combination.

The lottery table for adding the number of ART games during the bonus will be used for the ART lottery in the state where the ART is not won (until the normal BB transitioned from the general game state wins the ART lottery). That is, if the number of additional games is determined to be 1 or more (actually, at least 50 games) in the ART non-winning state, the ART lottery is won and the corresponding number of games is given. On the other hand, in the state after winning the ART, the lottery table for adding the number of ART games during the bonus is used for the lottery for adding the number of ART games.

<CT lottery table at the end of bonus>
FIG. 75 is a bonus end CT lottery table used for a CT lottery performed at the end of the bonus state. The CT lottery table at the end of the bonus defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the CT lottery in association with the bonus type and the game state before the transition to the bonus state. With reference to the CT lottery table at the end of the bonus shown in FIG. 75, for example, if the normal BB is performed during the normal ART, it can be seen that the CT is won with a probability of 50% at the end of the bonus state.

[Exceptional game flow during general game state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 76, an exceptional game flow during the general game state will be described.
In the pachi-slot machine 1, basically, the normal gaming state is shifted to the CZ during the general gaming state, and the ART gaming state is aimed at by winning the ART lottery in the CZ. Here, the pachislot machine 1 realizes the ART gaming state by notifying during the RT4 gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 76, the RT gaming state is controlled according to the combination of the displayed symbols. doing. As shown in FIG. 50, the combination of symbols for shifting the RT game state is displayed according to the order (pushing order) of the stop operation of the player, so that even if the notification is not performed. , It may accidentally shift to the RT4 game state.

Further, in the RT4 gaming state, the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" may be determined as the internal winning combination, so even in the general gaming state (non-ART), It is possible to display the reach eye (reach eye lip) to which a special privilege is given. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, when the player accidentally shifts to the RT4 gaming state during the general gaming state (non-ART), the combination of the symbols of the "reach eye lip" is displayed. When it becomes possible, it is possible to shift to the ART gaming state (normal ART) without going through the CZ.

More specifically, when the combinations "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are determined as internal winning combinations during the general game state and the RT4 game state, a flag conversion lottery is performed, and this When the flag conversion lottery is won, a notification is given to display the combination of the symbols of the "reach eye lip", and the right of ART is granted. On the contrary, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "replay" is performed, and the combination of the symbols of the "reach eye lip" is controlled so as not to be displayed.

<Flag conversion lottery table during non-ART>
FIG. 77 is a non-ART flag conversion lottery table used for the flag conversion lottery performed during the general game state and the RT4 game state. The non-ART flag conversion lottery table defines the lottery value information for the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

[Notification by main side control]
In pachislot machines, conventionally, information on stop operations (pushing order, etc.) has been notified to the ART machine under the control of the sub (sub-control board 72) side, but the presence or absence of the notification is in the interest of the player ( In recent years, it has been required that the main (main control board 71) side, which manages the interests of the player, perform the notification in order to affect the so-called payout. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the information display 14 controlled by the main control board 71 is provided with an instruction monitor for notifying the stop operation information, and the stop operation information is notified under the control of the main side. I'm supposed to do it.

FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the notification (navigation) performed on the main side and the notification (navigation) performed on the sub side. As shown in FIG. 78, the main control board 71 notifies the information of the stop operation by displaying the numerical values of “1” to “11” on the instruction monitor. The numerical values of "1" to "11" uniquely correspond to the contents of the stop operation notified by each, and "1" to "3" indicate the types of reels that perform the first stop operation, respectively. "1" means that the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L, "2" means that the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C, and "3". Means that the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R.

Further, "4" to "9" indicate the push order to be notified, "4" means that the push order is "left, middle, right", and "5" means that the push order is "left". "Left, right, middle" means "6" means that the push order is "middle, left, right", and "7" means that the push order is "middle, right, left". That is, "8" means that the push order is "right, left, middle", and "9" means that the push order is "right, middle, left".

Further, "10" and "11" are for notifying the role related to the bonus, and "10" means a combination of symbols "C_BB1" consisting of "white 7-white 7-white 7", and "11". Means the combination of symbols "C_BB2" consisting of "blue 7-blue 7-blue 7". Although not shown in FIG. 78, "0" means that the notification is not performed, and the numerical value is not displayed on the instruction monitor.

Here, although the numerical values of "1" to "11" notified on the main side uniquely correspond to the contents of the stop operation to be notified, not all players can clearly grasp the contents of the notification. Absent.
That is, there is a possibility that some players may not be able to grasp the content of the notification simply by displaying "6" on the instruction monitor on the main side.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the content of the stop operation is notified on the sub side as well as the notification on the main side. Specifically, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with a display unit 100 controlled by a sub-control board 72, and notifies information on a stop operation under the control of the sub-side. For example, when notifying that the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L, "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and "1" is displayed on the sub side on the left reel 3L of the display unit 100. "1" is displayed above to notify that the left reel 3L is the target of the first stop operation. Similarly, when notifying the push order "middle, left, right", "6" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and "1" is displayed above the reel 3C in the display unit 100 on the sub side. , "2" is displayed above the left reel 3L, and "3" is displayed above the right reel 3R to notify that the pushing order is "middle, left, right". When "F_BB1" is determined as the internal winning combination, "10" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and "white 7-white 7-white 7" is displayed on the display unit 100 on the sub side. Is displayed to notify the player of the symbol to be aimed at.

As shown in FIG. 78 (A), “Bell Navi”, “Maintenance Lip Navi”, “RT3 Transition Lip Navi” and “RT4 Transition Lip Navi” are performed under the control of the main side during ART preparation. The "bell navigation" notifies the push order for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "bell" for the combinations "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd". In addition, the "maintenance lip navigation" notifies the push order for displaying the combination of the symbols of "replay" for the combinations "F_maintenance lip_1st" to "F_maintenance lip_3rd". In addition, the "RT3 transition lip navigation" notifies the push order for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "RT3 transition lip" for the combinations "F_RT3 transition lip_1st" to "F_RT3 transition lip_3rd". In addition, the "RT4 transition lip navigator" notifies the push order for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "RT4 transition lip" for the combinations "F_RT4 transition lip_123" to "F_RT4 transition lip_3rd".

The timing of the notification on the main side may be at least during one game in which the notification is performed, and is arbitrary. For example, the main side may be notified at the timing when the start operation is accepted, or the main side may be notified at the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the first stop operation to the third stop operation may be performed. The main side may be notified at the timing when any of the above is received. On the other hand, the timing of performing the notification on the sub side is preferably at least a timing before the first stop operation. In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, notification is performed on both the main side and the sub side at the timing when the start operation is accepted or when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is started. As a result, before the player performs the stop operation, the stop operation information is notified on both the instruction monitor on the main side and the display unit 100 on the sub side.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78 (B), during the ART gaming state, "Bell Navi", "Maintenance Lip Navi", "RT3 Transition Lip Navi", and "RT4 Transition Lip Navi" are performed under the control of the main side. In the ART game state (RT4 game state), a flag conversion lottery is performed, and a push for displaying a combination of "triple chili lip", "reach eye lip", or "replay" symbols based on the lottery result. The order is notified, but this notification is not performed on the main side, but only on the sub side.

As mentioned above, the combination of the "triple chili lip" and "reach eye lip" symbols is related to the granting of special benefits, so the presence or absence of notification will affect the player's profit (ball output). Can also be considered. However, in the pachislot machine 1, a special privilege is actually given based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery, and the combination of the displayed symbols does not affect the given privilege. That is, in the case of winning the flag conversion lottery, even if the combination of the symbols of "replay" is displayed, a special privilege is given, and conversely, the flag conversion lottery is not won. In that case, even if the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" and "reach eye lip" can be displayed, no special privilege is given.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, if the combination of symbols displayed in this way does not affect the profit (ball output) of the player, the instruction monitor on the main side does not notify the player. Notification is performed by the display unit 100 only on the sub side.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 78 (C) and 78 (D), during the RT5 gaming state (inter-flag state), notification is performed to aim at a combination of symbols according to the combination related to the bonus carried over as the internal winning combination. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 78 (C), when the combination "F_BB1" is carried over, "white 7 navigation" is performed, and as shown in FIG. 78 (D), the combination "F_BB2" is carried over. If so, perform "Blue 7 Navi". "White 7 Navi" notifies the role "F_BB1" of the information of the stop operation for displaying the combination of the symbols of "C_BB1", and "Blue 7 Navi" notifies the role "F_BB2" of the information of the stop operation. Notify the information of the stop operation for displaying the combination of the symbols of "C_BB2".

Here, as described above in FIG. 51, in the inter-flag state, the combination related to the bonus and any of "off", "F_special 1", "F_special 2", and "F_special 3" are determined as the internal winning combination. If this is the case, the combination of BB symbols can be displayed, and if other combinations are determined as the internal winning combination together with the combination related to the bonus, the combination of BB symbols cannot be displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 78 (C) and 78 (D), when the main control board 71 is controlled on the main side, the combination related to the carry-over bonus is "off", "F_special combination 1", and "F_special combination". Only when either "2" or "F_special role 3" is determined as the internal winning combination, "white 7 navigation" or "blue 7 navigation" is performed. As a result, the navigation on the main side can be performed at an appropriate timing in which the winning combination related to the bonus can be won.

In addition, the main control board 71 may perform "white 7 navigation" or "blue 7 navigation" only after notifying that the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination (bonus notification). Here, the bonus notification is performed, for example, by displaying the bonus confirmation screen or turning on the bonus confirmation lamp.

As an example, when the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to perform an effect (so-called continuous effect) performed over several games and display a bonus confirmation screen according to the result of this continuous effect. It is commonly done. If "White 7 Navi" or the like is performed on the main side during this continuous production, the result of the continuous production may be known in the middle, which may spoil the interest. Therefore, the main control board 71 of the pachislot machine 1 performs "white 7 navigation" or "blue 7 navigation" only after the bonus notification is made. The method of making the timing of the bonus announcement available on the main side is arbitrary.

As one method, when the combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 determines the number of games required to announce the bonus, and after digesting this number of games, "white 7 navigation" or "blue 7" A method of performing "navigation" is conceivable. More specifically, when the main control board 71 determines the number of games required for the bonus notification, the main control board 71 notifies the sub control board 72 of the number of games. The sub-control board 72 controls the effect according to the number of games, and displays the bonus confirmation screen at the timing when the number of games is exhausted, so that the timing when the bonus notification is made can be grasped on the main side. That is, the main control board 71 counts the number of unit games since the bonus-related combination is determined as the internal winning combination without carrying over the bonus-related combination, and after the counting result reaches the predetermined number of times. "White 7 Navi" or "Blue 7 Navi" when the bonus-related role and any of "Out of line", "F_Special role 1", "F_Special role 2", and "F_Special role 3" are determined as internal winning roles. I do.

Further, as another method, a method of controlling the bonus notification on the main side instead of the sub side can be considered. More specifically, when the main control board 71 determines the bonus-related role as the internal winning combination in a state where the bonus-related role is not carried over, the display unit 100 performs the effect (at least the number of games required for the effect). It is determined and notified to the sub-control board 72. By executing the effect notified by the sub-control board 72 and displaying the bonus confirmation screen, it is possible to grasp the timing at which the bonus notification is made on the main side.

Of course, the main side may be able to grasp the timing when the bonus notification is made by another method. In this case, since the main control board 71 cannot receive the signal from the sub control board 72 or the like, it is necessary to grasp the timing at which the bonus notification is made based on the signal that the main control board 71 can accept. .. For example, since the main control board 71 can accept the signal associated with the stop operation, a predetermined stop operation (for example, other than forward pressing) is performed in a state where the combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination. In that case, it is possible to announce the bonus. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 acquires information on the internal winning combination and information on the stop operation from the main control board 71, and the combination of these information is a predetermined combination (internal winning combination “combination related to bonus””. , Stop operation "other than forward push"), give a bonus notice. Since the trigger of such a bonus notification can be grasped by the main control board 71 as well, the timing at which the bonus notification is made can be grasped on the main side.

[Data table on the secondary control side]
<Character data table>
As shown in FIG. 79, the accessory data table is referred to by the sub CPU 102 to control the drive motor F21 and the drive motor E25 that drive the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 as movable accessories, respectively.

The accessory data table shown in FIG. 79 shows information on the sequence number, operation content, step number, pulse width, number of pulses, motor control direction of drive motor F21 and drive motor E25, and step transition from the left (in the figure, ". "Step transition") is associated.

The motor control direction indicates the control direction between the drive motor F21 (hereinafter, also referred to as “motor A”) and the drive motor E25 (hereinafter, also referred to as “motor B”). When the motor control direction is "+", the corresponding motor is driven in the direction in which the number of steps increases. When the motor control direction is "-", the corresponding motor is driven in the direction in which the number of steps decreases. When the motor control direction is "+" or "-", the corresponding motor is driven by the number of pulses by the phase current having the pulse of the period indicated by the pulse width.

When the motor control direction of the motor A and the motor B is "+", the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 move from the standby position direction to the exposed position direction, and the motor control direction is "-". In the case of, it moves from the exposed position direction to the standby position direction.

When the motor control direction is "H", all the phases of the corresponding motor are excited, the corresponding motor is stopped, and the stopped state is maintained. That is, when the motor control direction is "H", the corresponding motor is controlled by the sub CPU 102 so that the stopped state is maintained for the excitation stop time, which is the period indicated by the pulse width.

When the motor control direction is "0", the excitation of all phases of the corresponding motor is stopped, the corresponding motor is not driven, and the motor becomes rotatable with respect to an external force over the period indicated by the pulse width.

Information about step migration consists of settings, migration conditions and migration destinations. As for the setting, "1" is set if the migration condition is set, and "0" is set if the migration condition is not set.

That is, when the setting is "0", the next step is executed after the corresponding step is executed. When the setting is "1", when the corresponding step is executed, if the migration condition is satisfied, the migration destination step is executed, and if the migration condition is not satisfied, the next step is executed. ..

The sub CPU 102 manages and controls the position of the front screen mechanism E1 with a step count F based on the movable reference unit. The sub CPU 102 increases or decreases the step count F according to the number of pulses transmitted to the motor A configured by the stepping motor and the motor control direction. Specifically, if the motor control direction of the motor A is "+", the step count F is incremented by 1 each time the number of pulses is updated by 1, and if the motor control direction is "-", the step count F is increased. Is reduced by 1.

In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 102 sets the step count F when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position to "0", and sets the step count F when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front exposed position to "210". As a result, the position of the front screen mechanism E1 is managed and controlled.

The front screen mechanism E1 is regulated by a regulating member (not shown) so that the step count F falls within the range of "-2" to "215" with a slight margin in the range of "0" to "210". ing. The movable reference unit of the front screen mechanism E1 is a unit that can be calculated by the movable range of the front screen mechanism E1 (for example, 90 °) and the operating angle of the motor A that moves with one pulse.

The sub CPU 102 manages and controls the position of the reel screen mechanism F1 by the step count R based on the movable reference unit. The sub CPU 102 increases or decreases the step count R according to the number of pulses transmitted to the motor B configured by the stepping motor and the motor control direction.

In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 102 sets the step count R when the reel screen mechanism F1 is in the reel standby position to "0", and sets the step count R when the reel screen mechanism F1 is in the reel exposed position to "138". As a result, the position of the front screen mechanism E1 is managed and controlled.

The reel screen mechanism F1 is regulated by a regulating member (not shown) so that the step count F falls within the range of "0" to "138". The movable reference unit of the reel screen mechanism F1 is a unit that can be calculated by the movable range of the reel screen mechanism F1 (for example, 148 °) and the operating angle of the motor B that moves with one pulse.

In the accessory data table shown in FIG. 79, the basic operation 1 in which the sequence number is 1 moves the front screen mechanism E1 to the front exposure position (step count F = 210).

Specifically, in step 1, the front screen mechanism E1 is excited and stopped for 100 ms, and in step 2, the front screen mechanism E1 is driven toward the front exposure position for 250 pulses in a cycle of 3 ms, and the basic operation 1 is Move to step 3.

However, if the step count F representing the number of steps of the motor A in the sub CPU 102 is 210 or more, the basic operation 1 shifts to step 3 even if step 2 is being executed. In step 3, the front screen mechanism E1 is excited and stopped for 100 ms.

Similarly, in the basic operation 2 in which the sequence number is 2, the front screen mechanism E1 is moved to the front standby position (step count F = 0). In the basic operation 3 in which the sequence number is 3, the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to the reel exposed position (step count R = 138).

Specifically, in step 1, the reel screen mechanism F1 is excited and stopped for 100 ms, and in step 2, the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven toward the reel exposed position for 8 pulses in a cycle of 4 ms, and the basic operation 3 is performed. Move to step 3.

However, if the step count R representing the number of steps of the motor B in the sub CPU 102 is 128 or more, the basic operation 3 shifts to step 4 even if step 2 is being executed.

In step 3, the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven toward the reel exposed position for 180 pulses in a cycle of 3 ms, and the basic operation 3 shifts to step 4. However, if the step count R is 128 or more, the basic operation 3 shifts to step 4 even if step 3 is being executed.

In step 4, the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven toward the reel exposure position for 10 pulses in a cycle of 5 ms, and the basic operation 3 shifts to step 5. In step 5, the reel screen mechanism F1 is excited and stopped for 100 ms.

The basic operation 4 in which the sequence number is 4 is a sequence for moving the reel screen mechanism F1 to the reel standby position (step count R = 0). Specifically, in step 1, the reel screen mechanism F1 is excited and stopped for 100 ms, and in step 2, the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven toward the reel standby position for 8 pulses in a cycle of 4 ms, and the basic operation 4 is performed. Move to step 3.

However, if the step count R representing the number of steps of the motor B in the sub CPU 102 is 10 or less, the basic operation 4 shifts to step 3 even if step 2 is being executed.

In step 3, the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven toward the reel standby position for 160 pulses in a cycle of 3 ms, and the basic operation 4 shifts to step 3. However, if the step count R is 10 or more, the basic operation 4 shifts to step 4 even if step 3 is being executed.

In step 4, the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven toward the reel standby position for 100 pulses in a cycle of 5 ms, and the basic operation 4 shifts to step 5. However, if the reel standby position sensor F19 detects the reel screen mechanism F1, the basic operation 4 shifts to step 5 even if step 4 is being executed. Hereinafter, the reel standby position sensor F19 is also simply referred to as “sensor C”. Further, "OFF → ON" indicates that the corresponding sensor has changed from the non-detection state to the detection state.

In step 5, the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven toward the reel standby position for two pulses in a cycle of 5 ms, and the basic operation 4 shifts to step 5. In step 6, the reel screen mechanism F1 is excited and stopped for 100 ms.

The basic operation 5 in which the sequence number is 5 is a sequence in which the front screen mechanism E1 is moved to the front exposure position as in the basic operation 1. The difference from the basic operation 1 is that the step transition condition is not the step count F, but the front exposure position sensor E15b changes from the non-detection state (OFF state) to the detection state (ON state), and the step 3 has a 3 ms cycle. It is a point that is driven toward the front exposure position for 19 pulses. Hereinafter, the front exposure position sensor E15b is also simply referred to as “sensor B”.

The basic operation 5 is also used as the accessory data registered in the accessory start test accessory data registration process (see FIG. 97) for confirming the operation of the front screen mechanism E1 when the power is turned on.

The basic operation 6 in which the sequence number is 6 is a sequence in which the front screen mechanism E1 is moved to the front standby position as in the basic operation 2. The difference from the basic operation 2 is that the step transition condition is not the step count F, but the front standby position sensor E15a changes from the non-detection state (OFF state) to the detection state (ON state), and the step 3 has a 3 ms cycle. It is a point that is driven toward the front standby position for 20 pulses. Hereinafter, the front standby position sensor E15a is also simply referred to as “sensor A”.

The basic operation 6 is also used as the accessory data registered in the accessory start test accessory data registration process (see FIG. 97) for confirming the operation of the front screen mechanism E1 when the power is turned on.

The basic operation 7 having the sequence number 7 is a sequence for moving the reel screen mechanism F1 to the reel standby position as in the basic operation 4. The difference from the basic operation 4 is that the step transition condition is not the count condition of the step count R.

The basic operation 7 is also used as the accessory data registered in the accessory start test accessory data registration process (see FIG. 97) for confirming the operation of the reel screen mechanism F1 when the power is turned on.

The effect operation 1 in which the sequence number is 8 causes the front screen mechanism E1 to vibrate to a position corresponding to the step count F = 18. The effect operation 2 in which the sequence number is 9 moves the front screen mechanism E1 to a position corresponding to the step count F = 50.

In step 3 of the effect operation 2, the front screen mechanism E1 is excited and stopped at a position corresponding to the step count F = 50 for 65,000 ms. However, during actual operation, the effect operation 2 is performed by the player's operation or the like. It is expected to be interrupted by other renditions performed.

Therefore, after step 4, the front screen mechanism E1 is fronted in order to prevent the aged deterioration from progressing due to the continuous excitation of the motor A when the step 3 of the effect operation 2 is not interrupted. It is set to return to the standby position, that is, the stationary position.

In the effect operation 3 in which the sequence number is 10, the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to a position corresponding to the step count R = 72 and stopped. In the effect operation 4 in which the sequence number is 11, the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to a position corresponding to the step count R = 92 and stopped.

In the effect operation 5 in which the sequence number is 12, the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to a position corresponding to the step count R = 100 and stopped. The effect of dropping the reel screen mechanism F1 by the effect operations 3, 4 and 5 is realized by continuously executing the effect operations 3, 4 or the effect operations 3, 5.

In step 5 of the effect operation 3, step 3 of the effect operation 4, and step 4 of the effect operation 5, the reel screen mechanism F1 is excited and stopped for 65,000 ms at a non-stationary position where the reel screen mechanism F1 is half exposed. Similar to step 3, the subsequent steps are set to prevent the aging deterioration of the motor B from progressing.

In the effect operation 6 in which the sequence number is 13, the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to a position corresponding to the step count R = 106 and stopped. In the effect operation 6, the steps before step 7 are set so that the position corresponds to the step count R = 106 regardless of the position of the reel screen mechanism F1.

In step 7 of the effect operation 6, the reel screen mechanism F1 is excited and stopped at a non-stationary position for 65,000 ms. However, as in step 3 of the effect operation 2, the subsequent steps cause deterioration of the motor B over time. It is set to prevent it from progressing.

In the effect operation 7 in which the sequence number is 14, the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to the position corresponding to the step count R = 103, and then vibrated once to the position corresponding to the step count R = 93, and the step count R is vibrated once. Return to the position corresponding to = 103.

In the effect operation 8 having the sequence number 15, the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to a position corresponding to the step count R = 103 at a speed different from that of the effect operation 7, and then the step count R is performed at a speed different from that of the effect operation 7. It is vibrated once to the position corresponding to = 93 and returned to the position corresponding to the step count R = 103.

In step 9 of the effect operation 7 and step 7 of the effect operation 8, the reel screen mechanism F1 is excited and stopped at a non-stationary position for 65,000 ms, but the subsequent steps are the same as in step 3 of the effect operation 2. , It is set to prevent the aged deterioration of the motor B from progressing. The effect operation 9 in which the sequence number is 16 moves the reel screen mechanism F1 to the reel standby position at a low speed.

In the bonus data table, the sequence from the basic operation 1 of the sequence number 1 to the basic operation 7 of the sequence number 7 is executed by turning on the power of the pachislot machine 1 and the bonus activation test and the game state are changed. This is a sequence used when the screen to be displayed is changed when the screen is changed from normal to during a bonus game, during CT, or during ART, and the effect operation 1 of sequence number 8 to the effect operation 9 of sequence number 16 Is a sequence selected by the effect content or effect data determined in the effect content determination process (see FIG. 107).

As described above, the sub CPU 102 constitutes the drive control means for controlling the drive motor F21 and the drive motor E25 based on each step of the operation represented by the accessory data table. Further, the front screen mechanism E1 has a stationary position that can be stopped without exciting the motor A and an exciting stop position that can be stopped by exciting the motor A. In the front screen mechanism E1, the stationary position corresponds to the front exposed position and the front standby position, and the excitation stop position can be set to any position within the movable range excluding the front exposed position and the front standby position.

Further, the reel screen mechanism F1 has a stationary position that can be stopped without exciting the motor B and an exciting stop position that can be stopped by exciting the motor B. In the reel screen mechanism F1, the stationary position corresponds to the reel exposed position and the reel standby position, and the excitation stop position can be set to any position within the movable range except the reel exposed position and the reel standby position.

[Operation description of main control board]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 80 to 96, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control board 71 by using the program will be described.

<Main pachislot operation processing controlled by the main CPU>
First, the procedure of the main operation processing (processing after the power is turned on) of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 80 (hereinafter referred to as the main flow).

First, when the power is turned on to the pachi-slot machine 1, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the time of turning on the power (S1). In this process, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally, whether the settings have been changed appropriately, and the like, and initialization is performed according to the determination result.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 95 is cleared. The designated storage area referred to here is a storage area such as an internal winning combination storage area and a display combination storage area that requires data to be erased for each unit game (game).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs medal reception / start check processing (S3). In this process, the input of the medal sensor 46 and the start switch 64 is checked.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs an internal lottery process (S4). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the internal lottery table (FIGS. 42 and 43) according to the current gaming state, and draws a combination determined as the internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the combinations "F_BB1" and "F_BB2" are determined as the internal winning combinations in the internal lottery process of S4 (S5). When the combination "F_BB1" and "F_BB2" are determined as the internal winning combination (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently turns on the RT5 game state flag and sets the game state to the inter-flag game state (S6).

Following the processing of S6, or when it is determined in S5 that the combinations "F_BB1" and "F_BB2" have not been determined as the internal winning combination (NO), the main CPU 93 is subsequently subjected to the states described later in FIG. The game control process is performed (S7).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs the main side navigation control process (S8). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets navigation data (0 or a value of 1 to 11) according to the current gaming state and the internal winning combination based on the correspondence shown in FIG. 78. The set navigation data is stored in the start command and notified to the sub-control board 72. In addition, the notification according to the set navigation data is performed at an arbitrary timing.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs the reel stop initial setting process described later in FIG. 91 (S9). In this process, the reel stop control information used for the stop control is determined according to the internal winning combination determined in S5 and the current gaming state. The determined reel stop control information is stored in the main RAM 95 and used in the reel stop control process of S12.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a start command transmission process (S10). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates start command data and transmits it to the sub-control board 72. The start command data includes a sub-flag (see FIG. 53) and various information necessary for producing a game state and the like.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a reel rotation start process after performing the wait process (S11). In this process, the main CPU 93 requests the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, each reel is accelerated and controlled until its rotation speed reaches a constant speed by an interrupt process executed at a fixed cycle (1.1172 ms), and then the reels are accelerated. It is controlled so that the constant speed is maintained.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop control process described later in FIG. 92 (S12).
.. In this process, using the reel stop control information determined in S9, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing at which the left stop button 7L, the middle stop button 7C, and the right stop button 7R are pressed, respectively. Reel.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a winning determination medal payout process (S13). In this winning determination medal payout process, as a result of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R being stopped, the combination of the symbols displayed along the valid line is used, and the combination of the symbols such as the payout of medals and the operation of the replay is performed. Give profits. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a winning operation command transmission process (S14). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of the winning operation command and transmits it to the sub-control board 72. The winning operation command data includes various information such as a combination of symbols displayed along the valid line.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs the BB check process described later in FIG. 93 (S15).
In this process, the main CPU 93 controls the operation and termination of the bonus state. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs the RT check process described later in FIGS. 94 and 95 (S16).
In this process, the main CPU 93 controls to shift the RT game state based on the combination of the displayed symbols.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs the CZ / ART end time processing described later in FIG. 96 (S17). In this process, the main CPU 93 performs a CZ pullback lottery. When the CZ / ART end processing is performed, the main CPU 93 returns the processing to S2 assuming that one game (unit game) is completed.

<Control processing by state>
Next, the state-specific control process will be described with reference to FIG. 81. In the state-based control process, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the RT4 gaming state (S31). In the RT4 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs the flag conversion process described later in FIG. 82 (S32).

Following the processing of S32, or when it is determined in S31 that the RT4 gaming state is not in progress (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the normal gaming state (S33). ). If the player is in the normal gaming state (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs the normal middle start process (S34) described later in FIG. 83, and ends the state-specific control process.

On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in CZ (S35). If it is in CZ (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs the CZ middle start process (S36) described later in FIG. 84, and ends the state-specific control process.

On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not CZ (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in normal ART (S37). When the normal ART is in progress (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs a normal ART start-time process (S38), which will be described later in FIG. 88, and ends the state-specific control process.

On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the normal ART (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in CT (S39). If the CT is in progress (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs the CT start-time process (S40) described later in FIG. 89, and ends the state-specific control process.

On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not CT (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the bonus state (S41). If it is in the bonus state (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs the BB start time process (S42) described later in FIG. 90, and ends the state-specific control process.

On the other hand, if the current gaming state is not the bonus state (NO), the main CPU 93 performs other processing (S43) and ends the state-specific control processing. For example, when the main CPU 93 is preparing for ART, the main CPU 93 performs processing according to the preparation.

<Flag conversion process>
Next, the flag conversion process will be described with reference to FIG. 82. In the flag conversion process, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the start of CT (S50). If it is the start of CT (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently draws and sets the table number used for the flag conversion lottery during CT with reference to the flag conversion table lottery table during CT (FIG. 68). (S51).

Following the processing of S51, or when it is not the start of CT in S50 (NO), the main CPU 93 sets a flag conversion lottery table according to the current state (S52). For example, if the current state is the RT4 gaming state during non-ART, the non-ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 77) is set, and if the current state is the RT4 gaming state during normal ART, , The ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 62) is set, and when the current state is the RT4 gaming state during CT, the CT flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 69) is set.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a flag conversion lottery based on the internal winning combination (S53), and subsequently determines whether or not the winning is won (S54). If the flag conversion lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs the flag conversion process (S55). In this process, for example, when the combination "F_1 certainty lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination "F_1 certainty lip" is treated as the combination "triple chili lip".

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in non-ART (S56). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the transition to the RT4 gaming state is accidentally performed in response to the player's stop operation in a state in which the notification of the general gaming state (non-ART) is not performed. judge. If the current game state is non-ART (YES), the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the number of ART sets (S57), then sets ART preparation in the next game (S58), and flags. End the conversion process. On the other hand, if the current gaming state is not in non-ART (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the flag conversion process.

Further, in S54, if the flag conversion lottery is not won (NO), the main CPU 93 performs the flag maintenance process (S59) and ends the flag conversion process. In this flag maintenance process, for example, when the combination "F_1 certainty lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination "F_1 certainty lip" is treated as the combination "replay".

<Processing at start during normal operation>
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the normal middle start process will be described. In the normal middle start processing, first, the main CPU 93 refers to the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 56A, and performs CZ lottery based on the current CZ lottery state and the internal winning combination (S61).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the CZ lottery has been won (S62).
When the CZ lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the CZ of the type won in the next game (S63), and then sets the value corresponding to the CZ of the winning type in the CZ game number counter. (S64). The CZ game number counter is a counter that counts the duration of CZ, and when CZ1 is won, the first game number (for example, 12) is set in the CZ game number counter (first half). When winning CZ2, the number of second games (for example, 15) is set in the CZ game number counter (first half), and when winning CZ3, the number of fourth games is set in the CZ game number counter. (For example, 17) is set.

Following the processing of S64, or if the CZ lottery has not been won in S62 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the normal medium-high probability lottery table of FIG. 55 (A) for internal winning. The transition lottery of the lottery state of the CZ is performed based on the winning combination (S65), the lottery state of the CZ is updated based on the result of the transition lottery (S66), and the normal middle start process is completed.

<Processing at start during CZ>
Next, the process at the start during CZ will be described with reference to FIG. 84. In the CZ middle start process, the main CPU 93 first determines whether or not the current gaming state is in CZ1 (S71). If it is in CZ1 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs the CZ1 (CZ2) middle process described later in FIGS. 85 and 86 (S72), and ends the CZ middle start process.

On the other hand, if it is not in CZ1 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the current gaming state is in CZ2 (S73). If it is in CZ2 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs the CZ1 (CZ2) middle process described later in FIGS. 85 and 86 (S74), and ends the CZ middle start process. In the present embodiment, CZ1 and CZ2 differ only in the rank (mode or point) in which the degree of expectation for winning the ART lottery is different, and the basic processing is the same. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the processing in CZ1 and CZ2 will be described as one processing as the processing in CZ1 (CZ2).

On the other hand, if it is not in CZ2 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs the CZ3 middle process (S75) described later in FIG. 87, and ends the CZ middle start process.

<CZ1 (CZ2) intermediate processing>
Next, the processing during CZ1 (CZ2) will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. In the CZ1 (CZ2) intermediate processing, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the first half of CZ1 or CZ2 (S81). The main CPU 93 shifts the process to S82 if it is the first half (YES), and shifts the process to S91 in FIG. 86 if it is not the first half (the second half) (NO).

In the case of the first half of the CZ1, the main CPU 93 refers to the CZ1 middle mode-up lottery table (FIG. 57) and performs the mode-up lottery based on the internal winning combination (S82).
Similarly, in the case of the first half of the CZ2, the main CPU 93 refers to the CZ2 middle point lottery table (FIG. 58) and performs the point-up lottery based on the internal winning combination (S82). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 updates the mode (or points) based on the lottery result of S82 (S83).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the freeze has been won in the lottery of S82 (S84). If the freeze is won (YES), the main CPU 93 performs a freeze process for temporarily stopping the progress of the game, and adds 1 to the number of ART sets and the number of CT sets (S85). In this process, the main CPU 93 further determines and sets the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 63 (A)). When a freeze occurs, "ART level 2" is determined as the ART level. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 ends CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S86), and ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2).

On the other hand, if the freeze is not won in S84 (NO), the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the CZ game number counter (first half) (S87). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter (first half) is 0 (S88). If the CZ game number counter (first half) is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2).

On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter (first half) is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets the second half of CZ1 or CZ2 in the next game (S89), and ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2). To do.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 86, in the case of the latter half of CZ1 or CZ2, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the first game of the latter half (S91). In the case of the first game of the second half, the ART lottery is performed based on the mode or points of the first half with reference to the ART lottery table in CZ (FIGS. 59 (A) and (B)) (S92). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S93).

If the ART lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets and draws the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 63 (A)). , Set (S94). Following the processing of S94, or when the ART lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 93 sets a predetermined value in the CZ game number counter (second half) (S95). For example, the main CPU 93 sets "4" in the CZ game number counter (second half) when the ART lottery is won, and "3" is set in the CZ game number counter (second half) when the ART lottery is not won. "Is set.

Following the processing of S95, or if it is not one game in the latter half of S91 (NO), the main CPU 93 serves as an internal winning combination with reference to the ART lottery table in CZ (FIG. 59 (C)). Based on this, an ART lottery is performed (S96), and it is determined whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S97). If the ART lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets and draws the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 63 (A)). And set (S98).

Following the processing of S98, or when the ART lottery is not won in S97 (NO), the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the CZ game number counter (second half) (S99).
Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter (second half) is 0 (S100). If the CZ game number counter (second half) is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2).

On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter (second half) is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the number of ART sets is 1 or more (S101). When the number of ART sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently ends CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S102), and ends CZ1 (CZ2) processing. .. On the other hand, when the number of ART sets is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets the time when CZ fails (S103) and ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2).

<CZ3 middle processing>
Next, the processing during CZ3 will be described with reference to FIG. 87. In the CZ3 middle processing, first, the main CPU 93 referred to the CZ middle ART lottery table (FIG. 60 (D)) and performed an ART lottery based on the internal winning combination (S121), and did the ART lottery win? It is determined whether or not (S122).

If the ART lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets and the number of CT sets (S123). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the freeze has been won in the ART lottery of S121 (S124). If the freeze is won (YES), the main CPU 93 performs a freeze process to temporarily stop the progress of the game (S125).

Following the processing of S125, or if the freeze has not been won in S124 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently draws the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 63 (A)). And set (S126). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 ends CZ, sets ART preparation in progress for the next game (S127), and ends CZ3 middle processing.

On the other hand, if the ART lottery is not won in S122 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CZ game number counter (S128). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter is 0 (S129). If the CZ game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the processing during CZ3.

On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter is 0, the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the number of ART sets, and draws and sets the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 63 (A)). (S130). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 ends CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S131), and ends CZ3 middle processing.

<Processing at start during normal ART>
Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the process at the start during normal ART will be described. In the normal start processing during ART, the main CPU 93 first adds 1 to the ART continuous game number counter (S141). The ART continuous game number counter is a counter that normally counts the number of games that ART has continued. In the present embodiment, in addition to the ART continuous game number counter, an ART end game number counter that counts the number of games that can be normally continued by ART is provided. Then, the pachislot machine 1 compares the value of the ART continuous game number counter with the value of the ART end game number counter, and when the value of the ART continuous game number counter reaches the value of the ART end game number counter, the ART game state is changed. finish.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the CT lottery table during ART (FIG. 65), performs a CT lottery based on the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination (S142), and whether or not the CT lottery is won. Is determined (S143). If the CT lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the number of CT sets, sets 8 to the CT game number counter (S144), and then sets the type that wins the next game. CT is set (S145).

Following the processing of S145, or when the CT lottery is not won in S143 (NO), the main CPU 93 refers to the ART level determination table (FIG. 63 (B)) and counts the number of ART continuous games. The ART level is drawn and set based on the value of (S146). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 draws and sets the CT lottery state of the migration destination based on the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination with reference to the normal ART medium-high probability lottery table (FIG. 64) (S147). ..

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the additional lottery table during normal ART (FIG. 66), performs an additional lottery for the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination (S148), and determines whether or not the additional lottery has been won. Judgment (S149). If the additional lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S150).

Following the processing of S150, or when the additional lottery is not won in S149 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently reaches the value of the ART continuous game number counter to the value of the ART end game number counter. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S151). If the value of the ART continuation game number counter does not reach the value of the ART end game number counter (NO), the main CPU 93 normally ends the process at the start during ART.

On the other hand, when the value of the ART continuation game number counter reaches the value of the ART end game number counter (YES), the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the ART set number (S152), and then at the end of ART. It is set (S153), and the normal start processing during ART is ended.

<Processing at start during CT>
Next, the process at the start during CT will be described with reference to FIG. 89. In the process at the start of CT, first, the main CPU 93 refers to the additional lottery table during CT (FIG. 70) and performs an additional lottery for the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination (S161), and the additional lottery is performed. It is determined whether or not the player has won (S162).

If the additional lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S163). As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT, the amount of addition per time increases.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is the combination “triple chili lip” (that is, whether or not it is converted to the combination “triple chili lip” in the flag conversion process of FIG. 82) (S164). ). When the internal winning combination is the combination "triple chili lip" (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently resets 8 to the CT game number counter (S165), and ends the processing at the start during CT. Further, when the internal winning combination is not the combination "triple chili lip", the (NO) main CPU 93 ends the processing at the start during CT.

In S162, when the additional lottery is not won (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the additional lottery table for the number of sets during CT (FIG. 71) and determines the number of CT sets based on the internal winning combination. An additional lottery is performed (S166), and it is determined whether or not the additional lottery for the number of CT sets has been won (S167). If the lottery for adding the number of CT sets is won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds 1 to the number of CT sets (S168), and ends the processing at the start during CT.

On the other hand, if the additional lottery for the number of CT sets is not won (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CT game number counter (S169), and subsequently, as a result of the subtraction, the CT game number counter. Is determined to be 0 (S170). If the CT game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the process at the start during CT.

When the CT game number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CT set number (S171). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of CT sets is 1 or more (S172). When the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets 8 in the CT game number counter (S173), and ends the process at the start during CT. On the other hand, when the number of CT sets is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 93 ends CT, sets a normal ART for the next game (S174), and ends the processing at the start during CT.

<Processing at start during BB>
Next, the process at the start during BB will be described with reference to FIG. 90. In the BB middle start process, first, the main CPU 93 refers to the bonus lottery table for adding the number of ART games (FIG. 74), and draws the number of ART games added based on the internal winning combination (S181). It is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won (S182). If the additional lottery is not won (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the process at the start during BB.

On the other hand, when the additional lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S183). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of ART sets is 0 (S184). If the number of ART sets is not 0, the main CPU 93 ends the BB start process. On the other hand, when the number of ART sets is 0, the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the number of ART sets (S185), and ends the process at the start during BB.

<Reel stop initial setting process>
Next, the reel stop initial setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 91. In the reel stop initial setting process, first, the main CPU 93 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (not shown) and acquires the reel stop number based on the internal winning combination or the like (S191). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the rotating cylinder stop initial setting table, and acquires each information based on the rotating cylinder stop number (S192). In this process, the main CPU 93 acquires various information associated with the rotation stop number, such as determination data for each pressing order.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 stores the rotating identifier in the symbol code storage area (not shown) (S193). That is, the main CPU 93 sets the bits of the entire symbol code storage area (excluding the unused area) to "1". Subsequently, the main CPU 93 stores 3 in the stop button non-operation counter (S194), and ends the reel stop initial setting process. The stop button non-operation counter is for determining the number of stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R that have not been stopped by the player, and is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95.

<Reel stop control process>
Subsequently, the reel stop control process will be described with reference to FIG. 92. In the reel stop control process, the main CPU 93 first determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S201). This process is a process of determining whether or not a signal is output from the stop switch 17S. If the main CPU 93 determines that the valid stop button has not been pressed (NO), the main CPU 93 repeatedly executes the process of step S201.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (YES), the pressing order storage area (not shown) and the operation stop button storage area (not shown) depend on the pressed stop button. (Not shown) and is updated (S202). That is, the main CPU 93 manages the type of the pressed stop button by updating the operation stop button storage area, and updates the pressing order storage area based on the type of the pressed stop button and its order. Use to manage the order of stop operations (push order).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the stop button non-operation counter (S203), determines the search target reel from the operation stop button (S204), and stores the stop start position in the main RAM 95 based on the symbol counter (S204). S205). The stop start position is a symbol position corresponding to the symbol counter of the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the sliding piece number determination process (S206). This sliding piece number determination process determines the number of sliding pieces specified at the stop start position based on the reel stop control information (stop table group) selected from the rotation cylinder stop initial setting table based on the internal winning combination. It is a process.

Next, the main CPU 93 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72, and stores the generated reel stop command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95. The generation process is executed (S167). This reel stop command data represents the type of reel to be stopped, the stop start position, the number of sliding pieces (or the planned stop position), and the like.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines the scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the number of slip pieces determination data, and stores the stop schedule position in the main RAM 95 (S208). The planned stop position is a symbol position obtained by adding any of the predetermined numerical values "0" to "4" defined as the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped. Is.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the scheduled stop position as the search symbol position (S209). Next, the main CPU 93 executes the symbol code storage process (S210). This symbol code storage process acquires the symbol code of the check symbol position data for checking the symbol position of the rotating reel.

Next, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol code storage area from the symbol code acquired in the symbol code storage process (S211). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a control change process (S212). In this control change process, the stop information group used for stopping the reel is updated when the reel is at a specific stop position.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the pressed stop button is released (S213). This process is a process of determining whether or not a signal is no longer output from the stop switch 17S.

If the main CPU 93 determines that the pressed stop button has not been released (NO), the main CPU 93 repeatedly executes the process of step S213. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pressed stop button is released (YES), the main CPU 93 transmits a reel stop command (S214).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (S215). Here, if it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 executes the pull-in priority storage process (S216), and executes the process of step S201. In this pull-in priority storage process, the pull-in priority of all the symbols of the rotating reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop control process.

<BB check process>
Subsequently, the BB check process will be described with reference to FIG. 93. In the BB check process, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is in the bonus state (S221). If the bonus state is set (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently processes the winning determination medal payout process from the BB payout number counter that counts the number of medals that can be paid out during the bonus state (S13 in FIG. 80). The number of medals paid out in (S222) is subtracted.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the BB payout number counter has become less than 0 (S223). If the BB payout counter is not less than 0 (NO), the BB check process is terminated, while if the BB payout counter is less than 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently continues. Process at the end of the bonus (S224). In this process, the main CPU 93 clears various information in the bonus state and sets the RT1 game state flag on.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the CT lottery table at the end of the bonus (FIG. 75), performs the CT lottery at the end of the bonus (S225), and determines whether or not the CT lottery has been won (S226). If the CT lottery is won, the main CPU 93 subsequently adds 1 to the number of CT sets (S227). If the CT lottery is won when the number of ART sets is 0, 1 is added to the number of CT sets in S227, and 1 is added to the number of ART sets.

Following the processing of S227, or if the CT lottery was not won in S226 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether the number of ART sets or the number of CT sets is 1 or more (NO). S228). When the number of ART sets or the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently ends the bonus state, sets ART preparation in the next game (S229), and performs a BB check process. finish.

On the other hand, when neither the number of ART sets nor the number of CT sets is 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently ends the bonus state and sets the normal game state in the next game (S230). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 draws and sets the lottery state of CZ (S231) with reference to the normal medium-high probability lottery table (FIG. 55 (B)), and ends the BB check process.

Further, when the bonus state is not in S221 (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the combination of BB symbols (C_BB1, 2) is displayed (S232). If the combination of BB symbols is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the BB check process.

On the other hand, when the combination of the symbols of BB is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently draws and sets the bonus type with reference to the bonus type lottery table (FIG. 73) (S233). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 sets a predetermined value (for example, 216) in the BB payout number counter (S234), performs the bonus start processing (S235), and ends the BB check processing. In the bonus start processing, the main CPU 93 starts the operation of the bonus and performs various processing such as setting the bonus state in the next game.

<RT check processing>
Subsequently, the RT check process will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95. In the RT check process, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the RT5 game state is in progress (S241). When the RT5 game state is in progress (YES), the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process, while when the RT5 game state is not in progress (NO), the main CPU 93 is subsequently in the RT0 game state. It is determined whether or not it is (S242).

When the RT0 gaming state is in S242 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the combination of the “bell spilled eyes” symbols is displayed (S243).
If "bell spilled eyes" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process, while if "bell spilled eyes" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 determines. Subsequently, the RT2 gaming state flag is set to on, the RT2 gaming state is shifted to the RT2 gaming state (S244), and the RT check process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is not in the RT0 gaming state in S242 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT1 gaming state (S245). When the RT1 game state is in progress (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the combination of the “bell spilled eyes” symbols is displayed (S246). When "bell spilled eyes" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets the RT2 game state flag on and turns off the RT1 game state flag, and shifts from the RT1 game state to the RT2 game state. (S247), and the RT check process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the "bell spilled eye" is not displayed in S246 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not 20 games have passed in the RT1 game state (S248). If 20 games have not passed (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process, while if 20 games have passed (YES), the main CPU 93 turns off the RT1 game status flag and RT1 The game state is changed to the RT0 game state (S249), and the RT check process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is not in the RT1 gaming state in S245 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT2 gaming state (S250). When the RT2 game state is in progress (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the combination of the symbols of the "RT3 transition lip" is displayed (S251). If "RT3 transition rip" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process, while if "RT3 transition rip" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 is Subsequently, the RT3 game state flag is set to on and the RT2 game state flag is turned off to shift from the RT2 game state to the RT3 game state (S252), and the RT check process is completed.

On the other hand, if S250 is not in the RT2 gaming state (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT3 gaming state (S261). When the RT3 game state is in progress (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a combination of symbols of "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 transition lip" is displayed (S262). When "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 transition lip" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the RT2 game status flag on and turns off the RT3 game status flag, and changes the RT3 game status to the RT2 game. It shifts to the state (S263) and ends the RT check process.

On the other hand, when neither "bell spilled eyes" nor "RT2 transition lip" is displayed in S262, the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the combination of the symbols of "RT4 transition lip" is displayed. (S264). If "RT4 transition rip" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process, while if "RT4 transition rip" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 is Subsequently, the RT4 game state flag is set to on and the RT3 game state flag is turned off to shift from the RT3 game state to the RT4 game state (S265).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not ART preparation is set (S266). If ART preparation is not set (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process, while if ART preparation is set (YES), the main CPU 93 has the number of CT sets. Determines whether or not is 1 or more (S267).

When the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 93 sets CT in the next game, sets 8 in the CT game number counter (S268), and ends the RT check process. On the other hand, when the number of CT sets is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 93 sets a normal ART for the next game, sets a predetermined value in the ART end game number counter (S269), and ends the RT check process. To do.

On the other hand, if it is not in the RT3 gaming state (NO) in S261, since it is in the RT4 gaming state, the main CPU 93 subsequently displays a combination of symbols of "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 transition lip". It is determined whether or not it is (S270). If neither "bell spilled eyes" nor "RT2 transition rip" is displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process, while "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 transition rip" is displayed. If it is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the RT2 game state flag on and turns off the RT4 game state flag, shifts from the RT4 game state to the RT2 game state (S271), and performs the RT check process. finish.

<Processing at the end of CZ / ART>
Subsequently, the CZ / ART end-time processing will be described with reference to FIG. 96. In the CZ / ART end time processing, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the CZ failure time or the ART end time (S281). If it is neither at the time of CZ failure nor at the end of ART (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the processing at the end of CZ / ART, while at the time of CZ failure or at the end of ART (YES). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the CZ lottery table (FIG. 56 (B)), performs a pullback lottery of CZ (S282), and determines whether or not the pullback lottery has been won (S283).

When the pullback lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets the CZ of the type won in the next game (S284), and sets the value corresponding to the CZ of the winning type in the CZ game number counter. (S285), the processing at the end of CZ / ART is terminated.

On the other hand, if the pullback lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets the normal game state for the next game (S286). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 draws and sets the lottery state of the CZ with reference to the normal medium-high probability lottery table (FIG. 55 (B)) (S287), and ends the CZ / ART end time processing.

[Explanation of operation of sub-control board]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 97 to 110, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control board 72 by using the program will be described.

<Character control task>
FIG. 97 shows the flow of processing of the accessory control task executed by the sub CPU 102.

At startup, the sub CPU 102 clears the step count F and the step count R to 0, and sets the accessory stop flag indicating whether or not to prohibit the movement of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 to OFF. The process is executed (S301).

Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the accessory start test accessory data registration process (S302). In the accessory start test accessory data registration process, the sub CPU 102 moves the front screen mechanism E1 between the front standby position and the front exposure position to obtain the detection results of the front standby position sensor E15a and the front exposure position sensor E15b. Based on this, the step count F is aligned with the position of the front screen mechanism E1.

Further, in the accessory start test accessory data registration process, the sub CPU 102 moves the reel screen mechanism F1 between the reel standby position and the reel exposed position, and steps based on the detection result of the reel standby position sensor F19. The count R is aligned with the position of the reel screen mechanism F1.

Further, in the accessory start test accessory data registration process, the sub CPU 102 obtains accessory data (see FIG. 79) representing the basic operation 1 of the sequence number 1 for moving the front screen mechanism E1 to the front exposed position as the initial position. It is stored in the sub RAM 103.

Further, in the accessory start test accessory data registration process, the sub CPU 102 obtains accessory data (see FIG. 79) representing the basic operation 4 of the sequence number 4 for moving the reel screen mechanism F1 to the reel standby position as the initial position. It is stored in the sub RAM 103.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the accessory data is stored in the sub RAM 103 and the accessory stop flag is OFF (S303). When the accessory data is stored in the sub RAM 103 and it is determined that the accessory stop flag is OFF (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the accessory operation sequence registration process described with reference to FIG. 98. (S304).

When it is determined that the accessory data is not stored in the sub RAM 103, the accessory stop flag is not OFF (NO), or after the process of step S304 is executed, the sub CPU 102 refers to FIG. 99. The accessory control process to be described is executed (S305). Next, the sub CPU 102 waits for 1 ms (S306), and returns the accessory control task to step S303.

Specifically, the 1 ms wait process is the remaining time obtained by subtracting the process time from step S303 to step S305 from 1 ms (for example, if the process time from S303 to S305 is 0.3 ms, the 1 ms wait process is 0. 7ms) Wait. Therefore, the sub CPU 102 processes the accessory control task at a cycle of 1 ms.

<Character operation sequence registration process>
FIG. 98 shows the flow of the accessory operation sequence registration process executed by the accessory control task whose processing flow is shown in FIG. 97.

First, the sub CPU 102 executes the movable screen position determination process described with reference to FIG. 100 (S310). Next, the sub CPU 102 has the effect data (step number, pulse width, number of pulses) included in the sequence data associated with the accessory data table shown in FIG. 79 with respect to the accessory data stored in the sub RAM 103. , Information on the motor control direction of the drive motor F21 and the drive motor E25 and the transition of steps) is stored as operation data in the sequence data storage area allocated to the sub RAM 103 (S311).

Here, when the sub CPU 102 registers the operation data of the sequence data in the sequence data storage area, if the operation data of other sequence data is already stored, the sub CPU 102 of the sequence data to be registered in the sequence data storage area. The sequence data is registered in the sequence data storage area by adjusting the step number of the operation data and the step number of the operation data of the registered sequence data.

For example, when the operation represented by the newly registered sequence data is executed after the operation represented by the registered sequence data, a new step number of the last operation data of the registered sequence data is followed. The step number of each operation data of the sequence data to be registered is adjusted, and the sequence data is registered in the sequence data storage area.

Further, when the sub CPU 102 executes the operation represented by the newly registered sequence data before the operation represented by the registered sequence data, the sub CPU 102 follows the step number of the last operation data of the newly registered sequence data. As described above, the step number of each operation data of the registered sequence data is adjusted and the effect data is registered in the sequence data storage area.

Further, the sub CPU waits for the registered sequence data in any of the effect operations, the newly registered sequence data in any of the other effect operations, the reel screen mechanism F1 or the front screen mechanism E1. When the accessory data to be moved to the position is registered, the registered sequence data is canceled and the effect data of the newly registered sequence data is registered in the sequence data storage area.

Next, the sub CPU 102 acquires the operation data of the sequence data registered in the sequence data storage area from step 1, and registers the acquired operation data in the motor drivers of the drive motor F21 and the drive motor E25 (S312). The accessory operation sequence registration process is terminated. The sub CPU 102 controls the drive motor F21 and the drive motor E25 based on the operation data registered in the motor driver in another task (not shown) different from the accessory control task.

Specifically, based on the operation data registered in the motor driver, for example, if the motor control direction of the drive motor F21 is "+", the pulse width is 4 ms, and the number of pulses is 10, the drive motor F21 A The (A bar of the opposite phase) phase is excited by 2 ms, and the B (B bar of the opposite phase) phase is excited by 2 ms to subtract 1 from the number of pulses. Then, the excitation of the A and B phases is repeated until the number of pulses becomes 0. If the motor control direction is the "-" direction, the A and B phases are excited in the reverse excitation order, and if the motor control direction is "H", the pulse width time A (and the opposite phase) is excited. Both the A bar) and B (and reverse phase B bar) phases are excited.

<Character control processing>
FIG. 99 shows the flow of the accessory operation sequence registration process executed by the accessory control task whose processing flow is shown in FIG. 97.

First, the sub CPU 102 acquires the operating state of the drive motor F21 (motor A) and the drive motor E25 (motor B), that is, the motor operating state from the motor driver (S320).

The motor operating state is whether or not the motor is operating, the type of the operating motor (motor A or motor B), the pulse count (absolute value) in the operation data, and the direction of the operating motor ("+", " -”,“ H ”), pulse time (ms), pulse time count (ms), and when registered in the motor driver of the drive motor F21 and drive motor E25, the type of motor and the motor excitation in the motor direction The direction is set to the number of pulses in the pulse count, the pulse width in the pulse time, and 0 in the pulse time count.

Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a step count update process for updating the step count F and the step count R (S321). In the step count update process, the sub CPU 102 updates based on the pulse count of the motor operating state acquired in step S320.

For example, when the drive motor F21 (motor A) is operating and the pulse count is updated from "6" to "5", the sub CPU 102 sets the step count F when the motor direction is "+". 1 is added, and when the motor direction is “−”, 1 is subtracted from the step count F.

Specifically, when the motor direction is "-", the pulse time is 10 ms, and the pulse count is 20, the B (and B bar of the opposite phase) phase of the motor A is excited by 10 ms to A (). And the opposite phase A bar) When the phase is excited for 10 ms, the pulse count is updated from "20" to "19".

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the operations of the drive motor F21 and the drive motor E25 have been completed, that is, whether or not the motor operating state obtained by acquiring the operation end in step S321 indicates the end of operation (S322).

When it is determined that the motor operating state indicates the end of operation (YES), the sub CPU 102 updates the sequence data registered in the sequence data storage area to the next step (S323). For example, the sub CPU 102 updates the executed operation data with the data pointer of the sequence data storage area to the position of the next operation data (next step).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is operation data in the sequence data storage area (indicated by the data pointer) (S324). When updating the sequence data storage area, the sub CPU 102 registers an end block (for example, "0xFFFFH") next to the last operation data. Therefore, if the end block is registered in the sequence data storage area, the sub CPU 102 determines that there is no operation data in the sequence data storage area.

If it is determined that there is no operation data in the sequence data storage area (it was an end block) (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the accessory operation sequence registration process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is operation data in the sequence data storage area (not an end block) (YES), the sub CPU 102 acquires the operation data of the sequence data registered in the sequence data storage area and acquires it. The generated operation data is registered in the motor driver (S325).

If it is determined in step S322 that the motor operating state does not indicate the end of operation (YES), or after executing the process of step S325, the sub CPU 102 uses the sensors A to C (that is, the front standby position sensor E15a, The state of the front exposure position sensor E15b and the reel standby position sensor F19) is acquired (S326).

Next, the sub CPU 102 acquires the operation data migration condition from the sequence data storage area (S327). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the acquired migration condition is set (S328). Here, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the information setting (see FIG. 79) regarding the transition of the operation data step is set to "1".

If it is determined that the migration condition is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a step migration determination process for determining whether or not the migration condition is satisfied (S329). For example, to explain with reference to the accessory data table shown in FIG. 79, when the sub CPU 102 is executing the effect operation 3 in which the sequence number is 10, the step count R may be 72 or more in step 3. For example, it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied, and if the step count R is not 72 or more, it is determined that the transition condition is not satisfied.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the transition condition is satisfied as a result of the step transition determination process (S330). When it is determined that the migration condition is satisfied (YES), the sub CPU 102 updates the sequence data storage area so as to migrate to the step indicated by the migration destination (S331).

For example, to explain with reference to the accessory data table shown in FIG. 79, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the transition condition is satisfied when executing the effect operation 3 in which the sequence number is 10. , The sequence data storage area is updated so that the operation data in step 5 comes to the beginning of the sequence data storage area.

Next, the sub CPU 102 acquires the operation data of the sequence data registered in the sequence data storage area, and registers the acquired operation data in the motor drivers of the drive motor F21 and the drive motor E25 (S332).

If it is determined in step S328 that the migration condition is not set (NO), if it is determined in step S330 that the migration condition is not satisfied (NO), or after executing the process of step S332, the sub The CPU 102 determines whether or not there is a change in the detection state of any of the sensors A to C (S333).

When it is desired to determine that there is no change in any of the detection states of the sensors A to C, the sub CPU 102 ends the accessory operation sequence registration process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection state of any of the sensors A to C has changed, the sub CPU 102 executes a step count correction process for correcting the step count F or the step count R (S334), and the accessory The operation sequence registration process is terminated.

In the step count correction process, the sub CPU 102 sets the step count F to "19" when the item of the motor A is "+" and the sensor A changes from the detection state (light shielding) to the non-detection state (light receiving). to correct. Further, when the item of the motor A is "-" and the sensor A changes from the non-detection state (light receiving) to the detection state (light shielding), the sub CPU 102 corrects the step count F to "23".

The sub CPU 102 corrects the step count F to "192" when the item of the motor A is "+" and the sensor B changes from the non-detection state (light reception) to the detection state (light shielding). Further, when the item of the motor A is "-" and the sensor B changes from the detection state (light shielding) to the non-detection state (light receiving), the sub CPU 102 corrects the step count F to "188".

The sub CPU 102 corrects the step count R to "3" when the item of the motor B is "+" and the sensor C changes from the detection state (light shielding) to the non-detection state (light receiving). .. Further, when the item of the motor B is "-" and the sensor C changes from the non-detection state (light receiving) to the detection state (light shielding), the sub CPU 102 corrects the step count R to "2".

<Movable screen position determination process>
FIG. 100 shows the flow of the movable screen position determination process executed in the accessory operation sequence registration process shown in FIG. 98.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the start command is received (S350). If it is determined that it is not the time when the start command is received (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the movable screen position determination process.

If it is determined that the start command is being received (YES), the sub CPU 102 identifies the motor to be controlled from the motor A and the motor B from the operation data stored in the sequence data storage area (S351). Here, the sub CPU 102 identifies a motor whose operation data has a motor control direction of “+”, “−”, or “H”.

Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a movable screen interference determination process for determining whether or not both the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are exposed (S352).

In the movable screen interference determination process, the sub CPU 102 detects the current position of the movable screen driven by a motor different from the controlled target motor based on the detection states of the sensors A to C, the step count F, and the step count R. In this way, the sub CPU 102 constitutes the accessory position determination means.

For example, to explain with reference to the accessory data table shown in FIG. 79, when the effect operation 3 of sequence number 10 is executed, the motor B that drives the reel screen mechanism F1 becomes the control target motor, so that the front screen The mechanism E1 needs to be in the front standby position.

At this time, the sub CPU 102 determines that the front screen mechanism E1 is not in the front standby position when the sensor A is in the non-detection state (light receiving) or the step count F is not 21 or less, and the front screen. It is determined that the position of the mechanism E1 is an error F screen interference. In this way, the sub CPU 102 constitutes the accessory position error detecting means.

Similarly, when the basic operation 5 of sequence number 5 is executed, the reel screen mechanism F1 needs to be in the reel standby position because the motor A for driving the front screen mechanism E1 is the motor to be controlled.

At this time, the sub CPU 102 determines that the reel screen mechanism F1 is not in the reel standby position when the sensor C is in the non-detection state (light receiving) or the step count R is not 3 or less, and the reel screen. It is determined that the position of the mechanism F1 is an error R screen interference.

After executing the process of step S352, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is F screen interference (S353). If it is determined that the F screen interference is (YES), the sub CPU 102 moves the basic operation 2 of the sequence number 2 of the accessory data table shown in FIG. 79, that is, the front screen mechanism E1 to the front standby position. The operation data for this is registered at the beginning of the sequence storage area (S354), and 1 is added to the accessory error count (S355).

In addition, in order to move the front screen mechanism E1 to the front standby position, the basic operation 2 of the sequence number 2 of the accessory data table was used, but instead of the sequence number 2, the basic operation 6 of the sequence number 6 was used. May be good.

The accessory error count represents the number of times that an error related to the positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is continuously detected, and is cleared to 0 when the power of the pachislot machine 1 is turned off or by the watchdog timer. Will be done.

If it is determined that there is no F screen interference (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is R screen interference (S356). When it is determined that the R screen interference is (YES), the sub CPU 102 moves the basic operation 4 of the sequence number 4 of the accessory data table shown in FIG. 79, that is, the reel screen mechanism F1 to the reel standby position. The operation data for this is registered at the beginning of the sequence storage area (S357), and 1 is added to the accessory error count (S358).

In order to move the reel screen mechanism F1 to the reel standby position, the basic operation 4 of the sequence number 4 of the accessory data table was used, but instead of the sequence number 4, the basic operation 6 of the sequence number 6 was used. May be good.

If it is determined that there is no R screen interference (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines the screen position at the start of the game to determine whether or not there is an abnormality in the positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 at the start of the unit game. The process is executed (S359).

In the game start screen position determination process, the sub CPU 102 determines that there is an error in the position of the reel screen mechanism F1 if the sensor C is not detected when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front exposed position due to the effect. To do.

Further, the sub CPU 102 determines that there is an error in the position of the front screen mechanism E1 if the sensor A is in the non-detection state or the sensor B is in the detection state when the reel screen mechanism F1 is in the reel exposed position due to the effect. ..

Further, in the sub CPU 102, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position and the reel screen mechanism F1 is in the reel standby position due to the effect, the sensor A is in the non-detection state, or the sensor B is in the detection state, or If the sensor C is in the non-detection state, it is determined that there is an error in the position of the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1.

After executing the game start screen position determination process in step S359, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is an error in the position of the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1, that is, whether or not there is a position abnormality (S360). ..

When it is determined that there is a position abnormality, the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the accessory error count (S361). If it is determined that there is no position abnormality, the sub CPU 102 clears the accessory error count to 0 (S362), and ends the movable screen position determination process.

After executing the process of step S355, S358 or S361, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the accessory error count is 10 or more (S363). When it is determined that the accessory error count is not 10 or more, the sub CPU 102 ends the movable screen position determination process.

When it is determined that the accessory error count is 10 or more, the sub CPU 102 executes the error registration process (S364). In the error registration process, the sub CPU 102 registers the error type "YAKUMONO STOP" and the date and time of occurrence (year, month, day, hour, minute, second) in the error information history storage area of the SRAM constituting the sub RAM 103 without displaying the error screen. ..

As a result, the clerk (clerk) can display the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 from the error information history screen that can be displayed on the image display device 201a when the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 is not moving. It can be confirmed that an error regarding the position of is generated.

After executing the process of step S364, the sub CPU 102 sets the accessory stop flag to ON and ends the movable screen position determination process.

<Main task>
FIG. 101 shows the flow of processing of the main task executed by the sub CPU 102. The sub CPU 102 executes the VSYNC interrupt initialization process at startup (S370).

Next, the sub CPU 102 waits for VSYNC interrupt (S371). In the present embodiment, since the sub CPU 102 displays the video at 30 fps, the VSYNC interrupt occurs at a cycle of 33 ms. Therefore, the sub CPU 102 processes the main task at a cycle of 33 ms.

When the VSYNC interrupt occurs, the sub CPU 102 executes the chance button process described with reference to FIG. 102 (S372). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the navigation position designation process described with reference to FIG. 104 (S373).

Next, the sub CPU 102 executes drawing processing for the display unit 100 and the image display device 201a (S374). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the error display process described with reference to FIG. 103 (S375), and returns the main task to step S371. In this way, the sub CPU 102 that executes the main task constitutes a display control means that controls the display of the display unit 100 and the image display device 201a.

<Chance button processing>
FIG. 102 shows the flow of chance button processing executed by the main task whose processing flow is shown in FIG. 101.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the chance button LED 34 is lit (S380). When it is determined that the chance button LED 34 is lit (YES), the sub CPU 102 detects that the chance button 33 is pressed by the chance switch 35, inserts a medal, or presses the MAX bet button 11. It is determined whether or not a medal insertion command indicating that there was a medal insertion command has been received from the main control circuit 91 (S381).

If it is determined that the pressing of the chance button is not detected by the chance switch 35 and the medal insertion command is not received (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the chance button processing.

When it is determined that the press of the chance button is detected by the chance switch 35 or the medal insertion command is received (YES), the sub CPU 102 requests the LED board 82 to turn off the chance button LED 34 (the chance button LED 34 is turned off). S382).

Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the effect switching process (S383), and ends the chance button process. In the effect switching process, the sub CPU 102 determines the effect based on conditions such as the sub flag and the game state.

For example, the sub CPU 102 causes the display unit 100 or the like to display the number of additional games when the addition is decided during ART, and the chance button 33 is pressed when the bonus is won during normal or ART. Later, the production is switched to the production between the bonus flags.

If it is determined in step S380 that the chance button LED 34 is not lit (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the chance button effect triggered by the pressing of the chance button 33 is selected (S384).

The chance button effect is selected when the chance button lighting lottery is won in the effect lottery process executed by the sub CPU 102 when the start command is received or the winning command is received.

If it is determined in step S384 that the chance button effect has not been selected (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the chance button process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the chance button effect is selected (YES), the sub CPU 102 requests the LED board 82 to light the chance button LED 34 (S385).

Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the chance button effect (S386) and ends the chance button process. For example, in the chance button effect, the sub CPU 102 displays an image imitating the shape of the chance button 33 in a substantially central area of the display area of the display unit 100.

In this way, the sub CPU 102 causes the display unit 100 to display the effect image display means for displaying the image corresponding to the effect on the display unit 100 and the image corresponding to the effect triggered by the operation of the effect operation means such as the chance button 33. It constitutes an effect operation display means to be displayed.

<Error display processing>
FIG. 103 shows the flow of error display processing executed by the main task whose processing flow is shown in FIG. 101.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not an error is being displayed (S400). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not an error image indicating an error relating to the pachi-slot machine 1 is displayed on any of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1.

If it is determined that the error is not being displayed (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not an error has occurred (S401). Specifically, whether the sub CPU 102 has received an error command indicating an error detected by the main control board 71 from the main control board 71 (see FIG. 107), or has detected an error by the sub control board 72. To judge.

The error command is a process executed by the main CPU 93, for example, when a medal jam error detected by the medal sensor 46, a medal retrograde error, a payout medal empty detected by the hopper device 43, a hopper jam, or the like occurs. This is the command to be sent.

If it is determined that an error has occurred (YES), the sub CPU 102 acquires the states of the sensors A to C (S402). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sensor A is in the non-detection state (light receiving) and the sensor B is in the detection state (light shielding) (S403).

If it is determined that the sensor A is not in the non-detection state (light reception) or the sensor B is not in the detection state (light shielding) (NO), the sub CPU 102 indicates that the sensor A is in the non-detection state (light reception) and It is determined whether or not the sensor B is in the non-detection state (light reception) (S404).

When it is determined in step S403 that the sensor A is in the non-detection state (light reception) and the sensor B is in the detection state (light shielding) (YES), or in step S404, the sensor A is in the non-detection state (light reception). ), And when it is determined that the sensor B is in the non-detection state (light receiving state), the image output by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed in the front screen mechanism E1. From the rom cartridge board 76, an error image for the F screen, which is an error image for the front screen mechanism E1 as shown in FIG. 112, is output to the projector mechanism B2 (S405), and the error display process is completed.

If it is determined in step S404 that the sensor A is not in the non-detection state (light reception) or the sensor B is not in the non-detection state (light reception) (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the sensor C is not in the non-detection state (light reception). It is determined whether or not it is (S406).

When the sensor C determines that it is in the non-detection state (light reception) (YES), the image output by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed in the reel screen mechanism F1, so that the sub CPU 102 is the rom cartridge substrate. The R screen error image, which is an error image for the reel screen mechanism F1 as shown in FIGS. 76 to 113, is output to the projector mechanism B2 (S407), and the error display process is terminated.

If it is determined that the sensor C is not in the non-detection state (light reception) (NO), the image output by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D, so that the sub CPU 102 is the rom cartridge substrate 76. The W screen error image, which is an error image for the fixed screen mechanism D as shown in FIG. 114, is output to the projector mechanism B2 (S408), and the error display process is terminated. That is, the ROM cartridge board 76 constitutes an error image storage means for storing the error images shown in FIGS. 112 to 114.

If it is determined in step S400 that an error is being displayed (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the error has been cleared or whether the error display end condition has been satisfied (S409).

When the sub CPU 102 receives an error command indicating the cancellation of the error detected by the main control board 71 from the main control board 71, the error detected by the sub control board 72 is resolved, or the work of eliminating the error is performed. If the door key reset operation is performed after this is done, it is determined that the error has been cleared.

Further, the sub CPU 102 determines that the error display end condition is satisfied when the time measured by the timer elapses from the error display time with respect to the error of the sub control board 72 in which the display time is set.

If it is determined that the error has not been cleared and the error display end condition is not satisfied (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the error display process. When the error is cleared or it is determined that the error display end condition is satisfied (YES), the sub CPU 102 erases the error video (S410) and ends the error display process. That is, in step S410, the sub CPU 102 causes the display unit 100 to display the image before the error occurs.

In this way, the sub CPU 102 that executes the error display process identifies the screen mechanism on which the image output by the display unit 100 is displayed from the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1. A specific means and an error display means for displaying an error image indicating the detected error on any of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 when the error is detected are configured. To do.

Further, in the error display processing, when an error image indicating an error related to the pachislot machine 1 is displayed on any of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the sub CPU 102 uses the fixed screen mechanism D, The display area is narrower than that of either the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 and the image display device 201a as a non-movable sub-display device is displayed with an error image as shown in FIG. 115 showing the same contents as the error image. You may do it.

<Navigation position specification processing>
FIG. 104 shows the flow of the navigation position designation process executed by the main task whose process flow is shown in FIG. 101.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the navigation represented by the operation order notification video indicating the operation order of the stop operation is being displayed, depending on whether or not the navigation data (see FIG. 78) included in the parameter of the start command is other than 0. Judgment (S430). If it is determined that the navigation is not being displayed (NO if the navigation data is 0), the sub CPU 102 ends the navigation position designation process.

When the navigation data is other than 0 (when the navigation data is any of 1 to 11) (YES), the sub CPU 102 has a W screen display in which the image output by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D. It is determined whether or not it is inside (S431).

If it is determined that the W screen is not being displayed (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the navigation position designation process. If it is determined that the W screen is being displayed (YES), the sub CPU 102 has an effect of dropping the reel screen mechanism F1 corresponding to the second display device (“effect operation 3” or “effect operation 3” of the accessory data table. 4 ”) is being executed. It is determined whether or not the R screen is falling (S432).

If it is determined that the R screen is not falling (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the first navigation position display instruction (S433), and ends the navigation position designation process. In the first navigation position display instruction setting, as shown in FIG. 116, the sub CPU 102 sets the first display area included in the front surface (reflection surface of the front reflection unit D1) of the fixed screen mechanism D corresponding to the first display device. Use the navigation position.

If it is determined that the R screen is falling (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the second navigation position display instruction (S434), and ends the navigation position designation process. In the second navigation position display instruction setting, as shown in FIG. 117, the sub CPU 102 sets the second display area included in the lower surface of the fixed screen mechanism D (the reflection surface of the lower surface reflection unit D4) as the navigation position.

The navigation displayed at the designated navigation position is the navigation corresponding to the sub-side navigation data set by the sub-side navigation control process (see FIG. 109) described later, in the first display area or the second display. Displayed in the area.

<LED control task>
FIG. 105 shows the flow of processing of the LED control task executed by the sub CPU 102.

At startup, the sub CPU 102 executes an LED control initialization process that initializes the lighting state of each LED of the LED group 75 (S450). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is LED data registered in the sub RAM 103 (S451).

If it is determined that there is LED data (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the LED data registration process described with reference to FIG. 106 (S452). When it is determined that there is no LED data (NO), or after executing the process of S452, the sub CPU 102 executes the LED control process (S453).

In the LED control process, the sub CPU 102 performs output control to output the LED data registered in the LED data registration process to the LED driver. For example, the sub CPU 102 performs output control to output LED data processed by flushing or switching of color change patterns by the effect of the reel backlight to the LED driver.

After executing the LED control process, the sub CPU 102 executes the LED control update process (S454). In the LED control update process, when the LED is dynamically lit, the sub CPU 102 executes an update process such as RGB switching and a soft timer that manages the lighting / extinguishing time of each LED. After executing the LED control process, the sub CPU 102 waits for 4 ms (S455) and returns the LED control task to step S451.

Specifically, the 4 ms wait process is the remaining time obtained by subtracting the process time from step S451 to step S452 from 1 ms (for example, if the process time of S451 to S454 is 1.2 ms, the 4 ms wait process is 2. 8ms) Wait. Therefore, the sub CPU 102 processes the LED control task at a cycle of 4 ms.

<LED data registration process>
FIG. 106 shows the flow of the LED data registration process executed by the LED control task whose processing flow is shown in FIG. 105.

First, the sub CPU 102 acquires LED data as light source data from the sub RAM 103 (S460). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the LED data includes the back lamp effect data for executing the back lamp effect (S461). The back lamp effect is executed by the reel back lamps for the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R included in the LED group 75.

When it is determined that there is back lamp effect data (YES), the sub CPU 102 acquires the back lamp sequence data corresponding to the back lamp effect data from the LED data of the rom cartridge board 76, and back assigned to the sub RAM 103. Register in the lamp sequence storage area (S462).

In the back lamp sequence data, a plurality of light emission patterns (combination of lighting / extinguishing time), light emission colors, and brightness corresponding to the reel back lamps of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R constitute the reel back lamp. It is stored in units of one full-color LED.

When it is determined that there is no back lamp effect data (NO), or after executing the process of step S462, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the LED data includes the effect LED data (S463).

When it is determined that there is the effect LED data (YES), the sub CPU 102 acquires the effect LED sequence data constituting the effect LED data corresponding to the LED data from the rom cartridge board 76, and the effect assigned to the sub RAM 103. Register in the LED sequence data storage area (S464).

When it is determined that there is no effect LED data (NO), or after executing the process of step S464, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the LED data includes the state LED data (S465). The state LED data represents the lighting state of the decorative LEDs 23a and 23b indicating the gaming state.

When it is determined that there is the state LED data (YES), the sub CPU 102 acquires the state LED data corresponding to the LED data from the rom cartridge board 76 and registers it in the state LED storage area allocated to the sub RAM 103 (YES). S466).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the LED data includes side lamp extinguishing data (S467). When it is determined that there is side lamp extinguishing data (YES), low brightness data is registered in the side lamp data of the status LED storage area (S468). That is, if there is data for turning off the decorative LEDs 23a and 23b, the sub CPU 102 converts the decorative LEDs 23a and 23b into data for turning them on with low brightness.

If it is determined in step S465 that there is no status LED data (NO), if it is determined in step S467 that there is no side lamp extinguishing data (NO), or after executing the process of step S468, the sub CPU 102 determines that there is no status LED data. It is determined whether or not there is a request to turn on the operation button LED provided on the operation button (S469).

The operation button LED includes the MAX bet button 11 of the LED group 75, the LEDs provided on the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R, respectively, and the chance button LED 34.

When it is determined that there is a lighting request (YES), the sub CPU 102 acquires the operation button LED lighting data for which lighting is requested from the LED data, and registers it in the operation button LED storage area assigned to the sub RAM 103 (YES). S470), the LED data registration process is completed.

In step S469, when it is determined that there is no lighting request (NO), or after executing the process of step S470, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is a request to turn off the operation button LED (S471).

If it is determined that there is no turn-off request (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the LED data registration process. When it is determined that there is a turn-off request (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the operation button LED turn-off data (any one LED arranged on the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R, or 3) for which the turn-off is requested. All the LEDs) are acquired and registered in the operation button LED storage area assigned to the sub RAM 103 (S472), and the LED data registration process is completed. In this way, the sub CPU 102 that executes the LED data registration process constitutes a light source control means that controls the lighting state of the light sources such as the decorative LEDs 23a and 23b.

<Production content determination process>
FIG. 107 shows the flow of the effect content determination process executed in the main board communication task. First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the medal insertion command has been received (S480).

In the medal insertion command, when a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 22 is detected in the medal reception / start check process (see FIG. 80) executed by the main CPU 93, or the operated MAX bet button 11 is pressed. This command is sent when it is valid (the number of credits is 3 or more).

If it is determined that the medal insertion command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the medal insertion command reception processing (S481) for determining the effect content according to the parameters included in the medal insertion command, and the effect content. The decision process ends.

When it is determined that the medal insertion command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the start command has been received (S482), and when it is determined that the start command has been received (YES). , The sub CPU 102 executes the start command reception processing described with reference to FIG. 108 (S483), and ends the effect content determination process.

If it is determined that the start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the reel rotation start command indicating that the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has been started has been received (S484). ).

When it is determined that the reel rotation start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the reel rotation start command reception processing for determining the effect content according to the parameters included in the reel rotation start command (S485). , Ends the production content determination process. The reel rotation start command is a command transmitted in the reel rotation start process (see FIG. 80) executed by the main CPU 93.

If it is determined that the reel rotation start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the reel stop command has been received (S486). If it is determined that the reel stop command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the reel stop command reception processing (S487) to determine the effect content according to the parameters included in the reel stop command, and the effect content. The decision process ends.

If it is determined that the reel stop command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the winning operation command has been received (S488). If it is determined that the winning operation command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a process at the time of receiving the winning operation command (S489) to determine the effect content according to the parameters included in the winning operation command, and the effect content. The decision process ends.

If it is determined that the winning operation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the error command has been received (S490). If it is determined that the error command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes an error command reception time process (S491) to determine the effect content according to the parameters included in the error command, and performs the effect content determination process. finish.

<Processing when receiving start command>
FIG. 108 shows the flow of the process at the time of receiving the start command executed in the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 107.

First, the sub CPU 102 executes an effect lottery process for determining an effect based on a predetermined lottery value and a random number value for lottery (S500). In the effect lottery process, the character data used in the above-mentioned character control task (see FIG. 97), the chance button effect of the chance button process (FIG. 102) executed in the main task (see FIG. 101), and the drawing process (see FIG. Various data related to the video used in (not shown) (video, still image, type of screen used, etc.), LED data used in LED control task (see FIG. 105), sound control task (not shown) The sound data used in is determined.

Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the sub-side navigation control process described with reference to FIG. 109 (S501). As the lottery value used in the effect lottery process, a sub-flag (see FIG. 53) and a plurality of lottery values according to the gaming state are stored in the ROM cartridge board. The lottery random number value is updated by the program every cycle (33 ms) in the main task.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is necessary to change the focus of the projector mechanism B2 based on the effect determined by the effect lottery process (S502). The sub CPU 102 switches the screen mechanism to be displayed on which the image output by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed depending on the game state.

For example, when the gaming state is the general gaming state, the sub CPU 102 sets the screen mechanism to be displayed as the front screen mechanism E1. Further, when the game state is preparing for ART, the sub CPU 102 sets the screen mechanism to be displayed as the fixed screen mechanism D.

Further, when the game state is a bonus state, the sub CPU 102 sets the screen mechanism to be displayed to the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 according to the effect determined by the effect lottery process. Select one. Further, when the gaming state is in CT, the sub CPU 102 sets the screen mechanism to be displayed as the reel screen mechanism F1.

Since the sub CPU 102 outputs an image to the projector mechanism B2 with the same focus for the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the screen mechanism to be displayed is fixed screen mechanism D and the front screen mechanism. When switching between E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, it is determined that the focus needs to be changed.

Further, the sub CPU 102 does not need to change the focus when the screen mechanism to be displayed does not change, or when the screen mechanism to be displayed is switched between the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. to decide.

If it is determined that it is not necessary to change the focus (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the time of receiving the start command. When it is determined that the focus needs to be changed (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the accessory stop flag is ON (S503). The accessory stop flag is omitted because it is described in the accessory control task (FIG. 97) and the movable screen position determination process (FIG. 100) described above.

If it is determined that the accessory stop flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the time of receiving the start command. When the accessory stop flag is ON, the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 cannot be switched. Therefore, even if an effect requiring a focus change is determined, the sub CPU 102 Locks the current focus.

If it is determined that the accessory stop flag is not ON (NO), the sub CPU 102 requests the projector mechanism B2 to change the focus (S504), and ends the process at the time of receiving the start command.

The projector mechanism B2 is preset with a focus (focal length) on the front screen mechanism E1, the reel screen mechanism F1, and the fixed screen mechanism D. Therefore, the sub CPU 102 requests the projector mechanism B2 to change the focus by issuing a control command for changing the focus to the focus set for the corresponding screen mechanism. In this way, the sub CPU 102 constitutes a focal length control means for controlling the focus on the projector mechanism B2.

Further, in the present embodiment, the focus of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is set to be the same, and the focus of the fixed screen mechanism D is set to the front reflection portion D1 of the fixed screen mechanism D.

However, not limited to this, the focus of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 may be set individually, and the sub CPU 102 may be controllable so as to change the focus of all the screen mechanisms.

<Sub-side navigation control processing>
FIG. 109 shows the flow of the sub-side navigation control process executed in the start command reception process, which is shown in FIG. 108.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the navigation data (see FIG. 78) included in the parameter of the start command is other than 0 (S510). If it is determined that the navigation data is other than 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the sub side navigation data corresponding to the navigation data in the sub RAM 103 (S511), and ends the sub side navigation control process.

For example, when the navigation data is "4", the sub CPU 102 sets data for notifying the push order "left, middle, right" as the sub-side navigation data. As a result, the content of the stop operation can be notified on both the main side and the sub side.

If it is determined in step S510 that the navigation data is not other than 0, that is, the navigation data is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the sub flag (see FIG. 53) is "2" or "3". That is, it is determined whether or not it is "triple dust A" or "triple dust B" (S512).

If it is determined that the sub flag is neither "triple chili A" nor "triple chili B" (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the sub-side navigation control process. When it is determined that the sub flag is "triple chili A" or "triple chili B" (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the sub side navigation data corresponding to the navigation data in the sub RAM 103 (S513). End the sub-side navigation control process.

In step S513, the sub CPU 102 sets data for notifying the push order "right, middle, left" as sub-side navigation data. That is, the sub CPU 102 independently notifies the content of the stop operation on the sub side.

In this way, the sub CPU 102 responds to the navigation data when the added value is obtained (navigation data is not 0) with respect to the sub flag corresponding to the internal winning combination having a relatively high probability of obtaining the added value. If the added value cannot be obtained (navigation data is 0) by setting the sub-side navigation data, it is possible to recognize that the internal winning combination with a relatively high probability of obtaining the added value has won. Set the sub-side navigation data to notify the push order to display difficult combinations along the effective line.

The navigation notified by the sub-side navigation data is in the first display area (see FIG. 116) or the second display area (see FIG. 117) set by the above-mentioned navigation position designation process (see FIG. 104). Is displayed.

In the sub CPU 102, the navigation data (see FIG. 78) is determined by the main CPU 93, and the navigation data is transmitted from the main CPU 93 to the sub CPU 102 by the start command, and the sub CPU 102 is based on the navigation data by the sub side navigation control process. A stop notification means for determining a display area for displaying the set sub-side navigation data by a navigation position designation process (FIG. 104) and executing navigation is configured.

<Game record processing>
FIG. 110 shows the case where the start of recording the game information is requested at the time of receiving the winning operation command (at the end of the unit game) or during the unit game (when the recording start button 216a shown in FIG. 30 is operated). It shows the flow of the game record processing executed in.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not recording is in progress (step S520). If it is determined that recording is not in progress (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the game recording process. If it is determined that the recording is in progress (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the unit is being played (S521).

When it is determined that the unit game is in progress (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes one in-game recording process (S522) to record information according to the progress state of the game in the sub RAM 103, and ends the game recording process. To do.

If it is determined that the unit game is not in progress (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes one game end recording process (S523) for recording the game information related to the unit game in the sub RAM 103, and ends the game recording process.

In this way, the sub CPU 102 constitutes the game information recording means. When the start of recording is requested during the unit game, the sub CPU 102 executes the game recording process, records the information according to the progress state of the game, and records the game when the winning operation command of the unit game is received. Since the process is executed again and the game information related to the unit game is recorded, the recording of the game information can be started during the unit game.

[Switching the display screen of the image display device]
Next, with reference to FIG. 111, a method of switching the display screen of the image display device 201a of the touch panel unit 201 in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 111 (A) is an example of transition of the display screen of the image display device 201a in the situation where the game information is not being recorded, and FIG. 111 (B) is the image display device 201a in the situation where the game information is being recorded. This is an example of transition of the display screen of.

As shown in FIG. 111A, in a situation where game information is not being recorded, the sub-control board 72 (sub-CPU 102) displays a display screen displayed on the image display device 201a on the top screen 211, the menu screen 212, and the menu screen. It is controlled so that it can be transitioned only between various display screens that can be transitioned from 212. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 has a top screen 211 and a menu screen 212 based on a touch operation (for example, a tap operation for a predetermined button or a swipe operation on a display screen) acquired via the touch sensor 201b. Switch the display screen between. On the other hand, in the situation where the game information is not being recorded, the sub-control board 72 controls the display of the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 in an impossible manner. That is, in the situation where the game information is not being recorded, the player cannot display the game information screens 213, 214, 215 on the image display device 201a.

Further, as shown in FIG. 111 (B), in the situation where the game information is being recorded, the sub-control board 72 displays the display screen displayed on the image display device 201a on the top screen 211, the menu screen 212, and the menu screen 212. In addition to various display screens that can be transitioned from, control is possible so that transitions can be made between the game information screens 213, 214, and 215. That is, the sub-control board 72 controls not only the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212 but also the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 so that they can be displayed based on the touch operation acquired via the touch sensor 201b. Thereby, in the situation where the game information is being recorded, the player can display the game information screens 213, 214, 215 on the image display device 201a.

As shown in FIG. 111B, the transition order of the display screens between the top screen 211, the menu screen 212, and the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 is arbitrary. For example, the top screen 211 may be directly transitioned to the game information screens 213, 214, 215, or the top screen 211 may be transitioned to the game information screens 213, 214, 215 only via the menu screen 212. Good.

In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is not possible to directly transition from the top screen 211 to the game information screens 213, 214, 215, and the game information screens 213, 214, 215 only via the menu screen 212, It is possible to transition to 215. More specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to transition to the game information screens 213, 214, 215 by performing a swipe operation on the menu screen 212.

Here, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are not display screens provided with buttons corresponding to the menu screen 212, but display screens provided completely independently of the menu screen 212. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the information indicating the result of the game that the player has a strong interest in during the game, which is the game history, is related information that is not related to the result of the game such as the payout arrangement and the volume control. Display independently of. Then, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the game information is being recorded, the transition to the game information screens 213, 214, 215 is possible without requiring the menu selection operation on the menu screen 212. As a result, the pachi-slot machine 1 can easily access the information (game history) that the player wants to confirm in the situation where the game information is being recorded.

On the other hand, the menu selection operation on the menu screen 212 cannot transition to the game information screens 213, 214, 215, and the game information screens 213, 214, 215 cannot be transitioned unless a swipe operation that is not on the menu display is performed. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation for transitioning to the game information screens 213, 214, 215 can be handled as a hidden command in the situation where the game information is being recorded. For the player, his own knowledge of the pachislot machine 1 allows him to see a more detailed game history that cannot be seen by other players with little knowledge, so that he can play the game more advantageously than the other players. As a result, it can be expected that the game will be actively performed.

(Display of the top screen from the game information screen)
The pachi-slot machine 1 transitions from the game information screens 213, 214, 215 to the top screen 211 manually or automatically by the player. Specifically, when the back button is operated on the game information screens 213, 214, 215, the display screen is changed from the game information screens 213, 214, 215 to the top screen 211 (manual transition). Further, when a predetermined condition is satisfied while the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are displayed, the screen automatically transitions to the top screen 211 regardless of the operation of the player (automatic transition).

More specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, while the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are displayed, the insertion operation (operation of the MAX bet button 11 operation, operation of the 1-bet button, and insertion of a medal into the medal insertion slot 22). When the closing operation) is performed, the screen automatically transitions to the top screen 211. In addition, in a state (high lip state) in which there is a high probability that the winning combination (or sub-flag) related to the replay that activates the replay is determined as the internal winning combination (or sub-flag) as in the ART gaming state, the replay operation accompanying the replay winning As a result of the medals being automatically inserted, the chances of displaying the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 may be limited in the high lip state. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, when medals are automatically inserted by the operation of the re-game, when the start operation is performed instead of inserting the medals, the game information screens 213, 214, 215 are automatically displayed on the top screen. Transition to 211.

That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the re-game operation is performed, when the start operation is performed, the game information screens 213, 214, 215 automatically transition to the top screen 211, and the re-game operation is performed. If is not performed, when the input operation is performed, the game information screens 213, 214, 215 automatically transition to the top screen 211.

(Display of the top screen (or menu screen) from the display screen according to the menu)
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, various display screens (registration screen, explanation screen, array payout screen, reach eye screen, WEB introduction screen, and volume adjustment screen) that can be changed by the menu selection operation on the menu screen 212 can be displayed by the player. The transition to the top screen 211 (or menu screen 212) is performed manually or automatically. Specifically, when a predetermined button (for example, a top button) is operated on various display screens, the display screen is changed from the various display screens to the top screen 211, and a specific button (for example, a top button) is displayed on the various display screens. , Back button) is operated to transition the display screen from the various display screens to the menu screen 212 (manual transition).
Further, when a predetermined time elapses while various display screens are displayed, the screen automatically transitions to the top screen 211 (or menu screen 212) regardless of the player's operation.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the time for transitioning to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) is different depending on the type of the display screen currently displayed. For example, if the volume adjustment screen for adjusting the volume output from the pachislot machine 1 is displayed for a long time, it may be adjusted to an unintended volume due to an erroneous operation, and the erroneous operation makes other players uncomfortable. Therefore, the transition to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) is performed in a shorter time than the other display screens. On the other hand, the registration screen transitions to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) in a longer time than the other display screens in order to facilitate the registration of the player.

That is, various display screens are set with a time for transition to the top screen 211 (or menu screen 212), and the volume adjustment screen is set with a shorter time than other display screens. A longer time is set on the registration screen than on other display screens.

(Selection function for menu operation availability)
In the pachislot machine 1, the player shifts from the menu screen 212 to the registration screen, the explanation screen, the arrangement payout screen, the reach eye screen, the WEB introduction screen, and the volume adjustment screen, so that the player can perform various display screens. You can perform operations and check various information. Here, the functions that can be selected by the player may be restricted according to the settings of the game store.

For example, a game store can make it impossible for a player to adjust the volume by limiting the transition from the menu screen 212 to the volume control screen (for example, the volume button 212g is not displayed on the menu screen 212). ..

[Modified example of the first embodiment]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment has been described above. Subsequently, a modified example of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described.

<CT precursor game and notification lottery during normal ART>
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, in order to facilitate understanding, when a favorable state (for example, CT) is won, the next game is immediately shifted to the advantageous state. However, in a pachislot machine, when performing advantageous control for a player, the advantageous control may be performed after performing a predetermined number of games, instead of immediately performing the advantageous control. This predetermined number of games is called a so-called precursory game. In this modified example, for example, when a CT lottery is won during normal ART, a pachi-slot machine 1 that sandwiches a predetermined number of precursory games instead of immediately performing CT will be described.

As shown in FIG. 118 (A), during normal ART, CT lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination using the CT lottery table during ART (FIG. 65). If you win this CT lottery, it will shift to a state that is advantageous for the player called CT (additional chance zone), so until you win the CT, various lottery for CT lottery will be performed on the main side (main control board 71). .. Specifically, the main control board 71 performs an internal lottery to determine the internal winning combination, and also serves as the internal winning combination "F_certain chili lip", "F_1 certain chili lip", "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip". When any of "D" is determined, the flag conversion lottery is performed using the flag conversion lottery table during ART (FIG. 62).

On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modified example, the CT precursor after winning the CT lottery is the CT based on the role after the flag conversion lottery (that is, the role "triple chili lip" or the role "reach eye lip"). We will not perform lottery that gives benefits to players such as lottery. Then, during this CT precursor, the flag conversion lottery is performed on the sub side (sub-control board 72), and the notification content performed on the sub side is controlled based on the result of the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side. For example, when the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side is won, the information for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "reach eye lip" is displayed on the display unit 100, and when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the information is displayed. , Information for displaying the combination of the symbols of "Replay" is displayed on the display unit 100.

As described above, in recent pachislot machines, it is required to perform lottery that affects the profit (ball output) of the player on the main side, but in the pachislot machine 1 of this modified example, the lottery of the flag conversion lottery is performed. A period (during CT precursor) in which the result does not affect the profit of the player is provided, and the flag conversion lottery is performed on the sub side only during this period. This makes it possible to increase the chances of displaying a special combination of symbols called "reach eye lip" in a situation where the privilege of being in the CT precursor is decided, and the variation of how to show the combination of symbols increases. Therefore, improvement in playability can be expected.

Note that FIG. 118B is a flag conversion lottery table in the CT precursor used for the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side, and is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76. The flag conversion lottery table in the CT precursor defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side in association with the internal winning combination. Looking at the flag conversion lottery table during the CT precursor, the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are converted to the role "reach eye lip" with a very high probability during the CT precursor. I understand. As a result, when the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are determined as the internal winning combination during the CT precursor, the combination of the symbols of "reach eye lip" is displayed with high probability. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player that the player is in the midst of a sign. It should be noted that, once again, when the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side is won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "reach eye lip" is given, but the privilege is not given.

Of course, the flag conversion lottery during the CT precursor may be performed on the main side, but by performing the lottery on the sub side during a period that does not affect the interests of the player as in this modification, the main side It is suitable because it can reduce the data capacity and processing load.

<Another example of push order for triple chili lip display>
In the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, when the combinations "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as the internal winning combination, if the correct answer is given in the pressing order, the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" is displayed. However, if the wrong answer is given in the order of pressing, the combination of "replay" symbols is displayed (Fig. 50). In addition, it is assumed that the correct push order for the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" is "forward push".

In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 of this modified example, when the combination "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as the internal winning combination, the types of combinations of symbols displayed when the answer is incorrect are increased. , The order of pushing the correct answer is different for each of the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip".

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 119 (A), in the pachislot machine 1 of this modified example, the correct answer for the combination "F_certain chili lip" is "forward push (the first stop operation is the left reel). 3L) ”, and the incorrect push order is“ middle push (first stop operation is middle reel 3C) ”and“ reverse push (first stop operation is right reel 3R) ”. Then, for the role "F_certain chili lip", the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" is displayed when it is pressed forward, and the combination of the symbols of "replay" is displayed when it is "middle pressed", and "reverse push". When "" is displayed, the combination of the symbols of "double chili lip" is displayed.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modified example, in the combination "F_1 certainty lip", the correct push order is "reverse push", and the incorrect push order is "forward push" and "middle push". And.
Then, for the combination "F_1 certain chili lip", the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" is displayed when it is pushed backward, and the combination of the symbols of "replay" is displayed when it is "middle pressed", and "forward push". When "" is displayed, the combination of the symbols of "double chili lip" is displayed.

That is, in the pachislot machine 1 of this modified example, when any of the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, "forward push" is selected as the winning combination. "Triple chili lip" or "double chili lip" is displayed accordingly, and similarly, when "reverse push" is performed, "triple chili lip" or "double chili lip" is displayed depending on the type of winning combination. .. On the other hand, if any of the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, pressing "middle" will combine the symbols of "replay" regardless of the type of winning combination. Is displayed.

By doing so, for example, when the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as the internal winning combination, various navigations (notifications) aiming at the chili symbol become possible. Specifically, both "navigation that aims at the chili symbol by pushing forward" and "navigation that aims at the chili symbol by pushing backward" can be performed. In addition, when the role "F_certain chili lip" is determined as the internal winning role, "navigation to aim at the chili pattern by pressing forward" is a navigation to display "triple chili lip", and "reverse pressing". "Navi that aims at the chili pattern" is a navigation that does not display "triple chili lip" (double chili lip is displayed). On the contrary, when the role "F_1 certain chili lip" is decided as the internal winning role, "navigation that aims at the chili pattern by pushing forward" is a navigation for not displaying "triple chili lip", and "reverse". "Navi that aims at the chili pattern by pressing" is a navigation for displaying "triple chili lip" (double chili lip is displayed).

In the pachislot machine 1 of this modification, whether or not to perform these navigations is managed by a flag conversion lottery performed on the main side, and navigation is performed under the control of the sub side based on the result of the flag conversion lottery on the main side. Is executed.

FIG. 119 (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the flag conversion lottery on the main side and the navigation on the sub side during normal ART. During normal ART, when the combination "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 performs a two-step flag conversion lottery (see FIG. 62). On the sub side, the result of the two-step flag conversion lottery is acquired from the start command data, and the navigation to be performed by the display unit 100 is determined based on the result of the two-step flag conversion lottery.

Specifically, when the flag conversion lottery of the two stages is not won at the time of the flag conversion lottery of the first stage, the sub-control board 72 performs "replay navigation". In this "replay navigation", the sub-control board 72 notifies the player to press the button in the middle. As shown in FIG. 119 (A), the combination of the symbols of "replay" is displayed at the time of middle pressing regardless of the combination "F_certain chili lip" or "F_1 certain chili lip".

Further, when the first-stage flag conversion lottery is won out of the two-stage flag conversion lottery and the second-stage flag conversion lottery is not won, the sub-control board 72 performs "chili lip fan navigation". In this "Chile Lip Fan Navi", the sub-control board 72 notifies that if the role "F_certain Chile Lip" is an internal winning role (sub flag is "Replay"), push it backwards to aim at the Chile pattern, and the role If the "F_1 certain chili lip" is an internal winning combination (the sub flag is "replay"), it is notified to aim at the chili symbol by pushing forward. As shown in FIG. 119 (A), when the combination "F_certain chili lip" is pressed backward and when the combination "F_1 certain chili lip" is pressed forward, the combination of the symbols of "double chili lip" is displayed. Will be.

Further, when the flag conversion lottery of both the first stage and the second stage of the two-stage flag conversion lottery is won, the sub-control board 72 performs the "chili lip alignment navigation". In this "Chile Lip Alignment Navi", the sub-control board 72 notifies that if the role "F_certain chili lip" is the internal winning role (sub flag is "3 chili A"), push forward to aim at the chili symbol. Then, if the combination "F_1 certain chili lip" is an internal winning combination (sub flag is "3 chili B"), it is notified to aim the chili symbol by pushing backward. As shown in FIG. 119 (A), when the combination "F_certain chili lip" is pressed forward and when the combination "F_1 certain chili lip" is pressed backward, the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" is displayed. Will be.

As described above, the notification based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery does not affect the profit (although the flag conversion lottery itself affects the profit, the combination of symbols displayed as a result affects the profit. Is not given), the notification based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery is not performed on the main side (instruction monitor), but is performed only on the sub side (display unit 100). In this regard, as in this modified example, by performing not only "Chililip matching navigation" but also "Chilirip fanning navigation", navigation that does not affect profits can be performed in various ways on the sub side, which is interesting. Is improved.

[Effect of pachislot machine]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment prevents the front screen mechanism E1 from being stopped for a specified time (for example, 65,000 ms) or more while the drive motor E25 is excited. Therefore, the progress of aging deterioration of the drive motor E25 can be suppressed.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the drive motor F21 is deteriorated over time so that the state in which the reel screen mechanism F1 is stopped while the drive motor F21 is excited does not elapse for a predetermined time or longer. Can be suppressed. As a result, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment can suppress failures due to the progress of aging deterioration of the drive motor E25 and the drive motor F21.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the front screen mechanism E1 is moved to the stationary position, it is set as the front standby position or the second stationary position as the first stationary position according to the effect being executed. Since the front screen mechanism E1 is moved to the front exposed position of the above to end the effect by the front screen mechanism E1, the effect being executed can be ended without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to the stationary position, the reel standby position or the second stationary position as the first stationary position is set according to the effect being executed. Since the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to the reel exposed position of the reel screen mechanism F1 to end the effect by the reel screen mechanism F1, the effect being executed can be ended without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is output by the projector mechanism B2 among the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 when an error related to the game machine is detected. Since the error image corresponding to the screen mechanism on which the image is displayed is output to the projector mechanism B2, the visibility of the error image can be improved.

Further, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment outputs an error image corresponding to the screen mechanism on which the image output by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed from the error image stored in the rom cartridge substrate 76 to the projector mechanism B2. Therefore, the projector mechanism B2 can output an error image corresponding to the screen on which the image output by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a narrower display area than any of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 and is immovable, so that the display performance is stable. Even with 201a, an error related to the pachislot machine 1 can be confirmed.

Further, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved from the reel standby position, if the front screen mechanism E1 is not in the front standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 is moved to the front standby position. By moving the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position after moving the screen mechanism F1, the positional relationship between the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 becomes inconsistent, and these movable accessories do not operate normally. Can be prevented.

Further, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the front screen mechanism E1 is moved from the front standby position, if the reel screen mechanism F1 is not in the reel standby position, the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to the reel standby position. By moving the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position after moving the front screen mechanism E1, the positional relationship between the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 becomes inconsistent, and these movable accessories do not operate normally. Can be prevented.

Further, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment determines that the reel screen mechanism F1 is not in the reel standby position when executing the effect of moving the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position. Since the effect of moving the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position is executed after the mechanism F1 is moved to the reel standby position, the effect can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the effect of moving the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position is executed, if it is determined that the front screen mechanism E1 is not in the front standby position, the front screen Since the effect of moving the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position is executed after the mechanism E1 is moved to the front standby position, the effect can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the effect of moving the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position is executed, if it is determined that the reel screen mechanism F1 is not in the reel standby position, the front screen The reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to the reel standby position in order to insert the effect data representing the effect of moving the reel screen mechanism F1 to the reel standby position before the effect data representing the effect of moving the mechanism E1 from the front standby position. After that, the effect of moving the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position can be executed.

Further, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment determines that the front screen mechanism E1 is not in the front standby position when executing the effect of moving the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position. In order to insert the effect data representing the effect of moving the front screen mechanism E1 to the front standby position before the effect data representing the effect of moving the mechanism F1 from the reel standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 is moved to the front standby position. After that, the effect of moving the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position can be executed.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is related to the position of the screen mechanism in order to prohibit the driving of the corresponding screen mechanism when an error regarding the position of the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 is detected. It is possible to take measures when the screen mechanism as a movable accessory does not operate normally without requiring special processing for eliminating the error.

Further, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is affected by disturbance because it prohibits the driving of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 on condition that an error is continuously detected a predetermined number of times. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving of the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 from being prohibited when an error regarding the position of the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 is erroneously detected.

Further, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment executes the initialization operation when the power is turned on to the pachislot machine 1 (so-called "power-on reset"), so that the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 Since the error regarding the position of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 can be eliminated in order to reset the number of errors when the power is turned on. It is possible to take measures when the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 does not operate normally without requiring any special processing.

Further, since the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes an image display device 201a capable of displaying information related to the game in addition to the display unit 100 that displays the effect video during the unit game, the unit game Even inside, information about the game can be displayed without interrupting the production.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment displays a user interface image for starting recording of game information in response to an operation of the touch sensor 201b even during a unit game. Therefore, it is possible to start recording the game information from the unit game without interrupting the production.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even if the gaming state has not shifted to the predetermined gaming state, the decorative LEDs 23a and 23b, which are the light sources of the decorative portions 22a and 22b, are turned on at low brightness. In order to make it easier to visually recognize the patterns decorated on the decorative portions 22a and 22b, it is possible to make it easier for the player to know where the lighting is before and when the gaming state shifts to the predetermined gaming state. ..

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since the protective cover 20 has a predetermined ratio of light shielding property with respect to the light incident from the outside to the inside, the visibility of the image displayed on the display unit by the external light is improved. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

Further, when the decorative LEDs 23a and 23b are turned off, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment converts the light source data for turning off the decorative LEDs 23a and 23b into side lamp data for turning on the decorative LEDs 23a and 23b with a predetermined low brightness. In order to control the lighting state of the decorative LEDs 23a and 23b based on the converted side lamp data, the decorative LEDs 23a and 23b are lowered during the period in which the decorative LEDs 23a and 23b are required to be turned off by simply converting the side lamp data. It can be lit with brightness.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the light emission of the chance button LED 34 provided on the chance button 33 and the display of an image prompting the operation of the chance button 33 are linked, and the chance button LED 34 is turned off and the chance is turned off. Since the end of the display of the image prompting the operation of the button 33 is linked, the operation for directing can be promoted without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is triggered by the operation of the chance button 33 in order to determine the effect triggered by the operation of the chance button 33 based on the predetermined lottery value and the random number value for the lottery. It is possible to execute the effect of

Further, when the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment executes an effect triggered by the operation of the chance button 33, the pachi-slot machine 1 displays an image imitating the shape of the chance button 33 in the substantially center of the display area of the display unit 100. Since it is displayed in the area, the operation of the chance button 33 can be visually urged in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the effect triggered by the operation of the chance button 33 is executed, even if the chance button 33 is not operated, the predetermined execution condition is satisfied. For example, since the effect triggered by the operation of the chance button 33 is executed, the player's interest can be improved by the effect.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the effect triggered by the operation of the chance button 33 is executed, even if the chance button 33 is not operated, for the next unit game. Since the effect triggered by the operation of the chance button 33 is executed when the medal is inserted, the effect triggered by the operation of the chance button 33 can be executed with certainty.

Further, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment displays an operation order notification image showing the operation order of the stop operation so that the area for displaying the operation order notification image moves according to the movable position of the reel screen mechanism F1. By switching to the projector mechanism B2, the visibility of the operation sequence notification image is ensured, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

Further, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the reel screen mechanism F1 movable to the reel exposed position exposed so as to cover the fixed screen mechanism D is not in the reel exposed position, the fixed screen mechanism D is the first. 1 The operation sequence notification image corresponding to the display area is displayed in the first display area of the fixed screen mechanism D, and when the reel screen mechanism F1 is in the reel exposed position, it corresponds to the second display area of the fixed screen mechanism D. By displaying the operation order notification image in the second display area of the fixed screen mechanism D, the visibility of the operation order notification image is ensured, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

Further, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the reel screen mechanism F1 movable to the reel exposed position exposed so as to cover the fixed screen mechanism D is not in the reel exposed position, the front surface of the fixed screen mechanism D The operation order notification image is displayed in the first display area included in the above, and when the reel screen mechanism F1 is in the reel exposed position, the operation order notification image is displayed in the second display area included in the lower surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. By doing so, the visibility of the operation order notification video is ensured, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

Further, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a combination of symbols based on the "triple chili lip" when the "triple chili lip" has an added value when it is internally applied to the "triple chili lip". Is notified of the operation order of the stop operation to stop on the effective line, and if the "triple chili lip" has no added value, the combination of symbols based on the "triple chili lip" and the combination of symbols different from the combination of symbols are used as the effective line. By notifying the operation order of the stop operation to stop upward, even if the combination of symbols based on "triple chili lip" is stopped on the effective line, the situation where the player cannot obtain added value is avoided. There is.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even if the combination of symbols based on the "triple chili lip" is stopped on the effective line, the player cannot obtain added value, so that the player It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being reduced.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the front standby position sensor E15a for detecting that the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position changes from the non-detection state to the detection state, the step count F When the front standby position sensor E15a changes from the non-detection state to the detection state by correcting the step count F to "23" when the detection state changes to the non-detection state. , The error in the number of steps from the change from the detected state to the non-detected state is eliminated.

Therefore, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is produced by using the front screen mechanism E1 due to the deviation between the movable position of the front screen mechanism E1 managed by the sub CPU 102 and the actual movable position of the front screen mechanism E1. Since it is possible to prevent inconsistency from occurring, it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable.

Further, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the reel standby position sensor F19 for detecting that the reel screen mechanism F1 is in the reel standby position changes from the non-detection state to the detection state, the step count R Is corrected to "2" and the step count R is corrected to "3" when the detection state is changed to the non-detection state, so that the reel standby position sensor F19 is changed from the non-detection state to the detection state. , The error in the number of steps from the change from the detected state to the non-detected state is eliminated.

Therefore, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is produced by using the luscreen mechanism F1 due to the deviation between the movable position of the reel screen mechanism F1 managed by the sub CPU 102 and the actual movable position of the luscreen mechanism F1. Since it is possible to prevent inconsistency from occurring, it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment counts the step when the front exposure position sensor E15b for detecting that the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front exposure position changes from the non-detection state to the detection state. When the front exposure position sensor E15b changes from the non-detection state to the detection state by correcting it to "192" and changing from the detection state to the non-detection state, the step count is corrected to "188". The error in the number of steps from when the state changes to the non-detection state is eliminated.

Therefore, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is produced by using the front screen mechanism E1 due to the deviation between the movable position of the front screen mechanism E1 managed by the sub CPU 102 and the actual movable position of the front screen mechanism E1. Since it is possible to prevent inconsistency from occurring, it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable.

[Second Embodiment]
Subsequently, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 131. The same configuration and control as the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment will not be described in detail.

[Game flow of the pachislot machine of the second embodiment]
First, the game flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a transition flow of the gaming state regarding the presence / absence of notification of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment. Comparing the transition flow of the gaming state of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 120 with the transition flow of the gaming state of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 36, the first embodiment and the second embodiment are compared. The game is basically played in the same flow as in the form of, but in the ART game state, the game is played in a different flow. That is, the control of CT during the ART gaming state is significantly different between the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment and the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment.

Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, a CT lottery is usually performed during ART based on an internal winning combination, and when the CT lottery is won, the gaming state is shifted to CT.
On the other hand, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is different from the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in that CT is set between the MB flags in the ART gaming state. The MB (combination "F_MB") is a continuous differential device related to a so-called second-class special accessory, and in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the MB of the main control board 71 is internally won. Once determined as a winning combination, it is carried over as an internal winning combination over multiple games until the corresponding symbol combination (combination "C_MB") is displayed along the valid line.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 120, the MB non-flags in the ART gaming state are set as normal ART, and CT is performed between the MB flags in the ART gaming state. That is, in the second embodiment, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state between the MB flags when (H) MB is determined as an internal winning combination during normal ART. The game is performed so that the combination of symbols related to the MB is not displayed between the MB flags in the ART game state, and the main control board 71 performs CT during this period. It should be noted that a method of playing a game so that a combination of symbols corresponding to MB is not displayed between the MB flags is already well known. For example, a symbol that does not display a combination of symbols corresponding to MB is aimed at. This can be achieved by notifying and notifying the push order in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the MB is not displayed.

On the other hand, when the CT is completed, the winning of the MB is prompted (notified), and (I) when the combination of symbols corresponding to the MB is displayed, the gaming state shifts from between the MB flags to the MB gaming state. After that, when the end condition of (J) MB game state is satisfied, the game state shifts from the MB game state to the MB non-flag, and normal ART is performed.

<Characteristics of CT performed during the MB flag>
Since the MB is carried over as an internal winning combination during the MB flag, stop control different from that during the MB non-flag can be performed. For example, if the predetermined small winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination between the MB flags and the non-flags, the internal winning combination is "MB + predetermined small winning combination" because the MB is carried over during the MB flags. Although it is a "role", the internal winning combination is only a "predetermined small combination" because the MB is not carried over during the MB non-flag. Since the pachislot machine performs stop control based on the internal winning combination, different stop control is performed between the MB flag and the MB non-flag even if the same predetermined small combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Stop control can be performed based on the information, and as a result, the combination of symbols that can be displayed for a predetermined small winning combination can be different between the MB flag and the MB non-flag.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the stop control is different between the MB flag and the MB non-flag, so that it is difficult (or impossible to display) during normal ART (between the MB non-flag). ) By displaying the combination of symbols during CT (between the MB flags), various playability is realized. Hereinafter, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be specifically described while paying attention to the difference from the first embodiment.

[Correspondence between winning role and stop symbol]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122, the relationship between the combination of the internal winning combination and the displayed symbol in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. Since the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment and the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment differ in the types of combinations used and the types of combinations of symbols, this point will be described first.

(Type of combination used in the second embodiment)
In the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the roles "F_chili lip", "F_certain chili lip", "F_1 certain chili lip", "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are used. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combinations "R_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" are used instead of these combinations.

Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the combinations "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd" are used. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combinations "F_pushing order bell 1" to "F_pushing order bell 6" are used instead of these combinations. In the following, the combinations "F_pushing order bell 1" to "F_pushing order bell 6" may be simply referred to as "pushing order bell". Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, a combination (combination "F_MB") related to MB that the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment does not have is used. The other combinations may be common to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, or may be different from each other, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

(Type of combination of symbols used in the second embodiment)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, as a combination of symbols corresponding to the roles "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd", the symbols of "bell", "bell spilled eye", and "first piece" are used. The combination was used. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, as a combination of symbols corresponding to the combinations "F_pushing order bell 1" to "F_pushing order bell 6", in addition to the combination of these symbols, Use a combination of "MB" and "cactus" symbols. The combination of "MB" symbols may be arbitrary. Further, the combination of the "cactus" symbols may be the same as that of the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, but the number of medals to be paid out when displayed is the same as the combination of the "bell" symbols. It is assumed that (9 sheets).

<Correspondence between winning combination and stop symbol during MB non-flag>
FIG. 121 is a diagram showing the relationship between the internal winning combination during the MB non-flag and the combination of the displayed symbols. As shown in FIG. 121, the combinations "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and the pressing order is "F_single chili lip 4". In the case of "forward push", the combination of "replay" symbols is displayed along the effective line. On the other hand, if the push order is other than "forward push", the combination of "chili lip" symbols is displayed along the valid line in the correct push order, and the "replay" symbol combination is displayed in the incorrect push order. Is displayed.

More specifically, in the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_single chili lip 4", in the case of the correct push order for each role, the combination of the symbols of "single chili lip" is displayed, and each of them is displayed. In the case of incorrect answer push order for each role, the combination of "replay" symbols is displayed. In addition, in the roles "F_2 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_2 consecutive chili lip 4", in the case of the correct push order for each role, the combination of the symbols of "double chili lip" is displayed, and for each role. In the case of incorrect answer push order, the combination of "replay" symbols is displayed. In addition, in the roles "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4", in the case of the correct push order for each role, the combination of the symbols of "3 consecutive chili lip" is displayed, and for each role. In the case of incorrect answer push order, the combination of "replay" symbols is displayed.

In addition, during the MB non-flags, the combinations "F_pushing order bell 1" to "F_pushing order bell 6" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and the correct answer is for each combination. In the case of push order, the combination of "bell" symbols is displayed, and in the case of incorrect push order for each role, the combination of "bell spilled eyes" or "first piece" symbols is displayed. Is displayed.

<Correspondence between winning combination and stop symbol during MB flag>
FIG. 122 is a diagram showing the relationship between the internal winning combination between the MB flags and the combination of displayed symbols. As shown in FIG. 122, in the interval between the MB flags, in the combinations "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_triple chili lip 4", the combination of the symbols of "chili lip" is displayed along the effective line regardless of the pressing order. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when any of the combination "F_MB" and the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination, " The combination of "Chilli Lip" symbols is displayed along the effective line.

More specifically, in the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_single chili lip 4", the combination of the symbols of "single chili lip" is displayed along the effective line regardless of the pressing order, and the combination "F_2 consecutive chili lip 1" is displayed. ~ In "F_2 consecutive chili lip 4", the combination of the symbols of "2 consecutive chili lip" is displayed along the effective line regardless of the pressing order, and in the roles "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4", the combination is related to the pressing order. The combination of the symbols of "Triple Chili Lip" is displayed along the effective line.

Comparing FIGS. 121 and 122, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combinations “F_single chili lip 1” to “F_triple chili lip 4” are displayed according to the pressing order during the MB non-flag. While the combination of symbols is different, the combination of symbols whose pressing order is displayed is not affected during the MB flag.

Further, among the MB flags, the combinations "F_pushing order bell 1" to "F_pushing order bell 6" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and are determined for each combination. The combination of "bell", "bell spilled or first piece", "cactus", and "MB" is displayed according to the pressing order. Comparing FIGS. 121 and 122, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, more kinds of symbol combinations are used during the MB flag than during the MB non-flag when the winning combination “pushing order bell” is won. Can be displayed. Specifically, the combination of "bell", "bell spilled eyes or the first piece" is displayed according to the pressing order between the MB non-flags, while it is displayed according to the pressing order during the MB flags. The combination of the symbols of "bell", "cactus", "MB", "bell spilled eye or first piece" is displayed.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" and the roles "F_ push order bell 1" to "F_ push order" during the MB flags are used. The stop control for "bell 6" is different from the stop control for the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_triple chili lip 4" and the combination "F_push order bell 1" to "F_push order bell 6" during the MB non-flag. ..

[Flow of games during normal ART]
Subsequently, the flow of the game during the normal ART of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described.
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combinations of the symbols displayed in the combinations "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_triple chili lip 4" are different depending on the pressing order. In the pachislot machine 1, when the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" are determined as internal winning roles during normal ART, a flag conversion lottery is performed, and when this flag conversion lottery is won, "chili lip" is performed. In addition to notifying the display of the combination of symbols of, the number of ART games is added. On the contrary, if the flag conversion lottery is not won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of "replay" is performed without adding the number of ART games.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the additional amount of the number of ART games when the flag conversion lottery is won is determined based on the type of the combination determined as the internal winning combination. Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1, when the internal winning combination when winning the flag conversion lottery is the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_single chili lip 4", the smallest additional amount is determined and the combination Determine the next smallest additional amount in the case of "F_2 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_2 consecutive chili lip 4", and determine the largest additional amount in the case of the combination "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4". To do. As described above, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a notification is given to display the combination of the symbols of "Chile Lip". Therefore, for the player, the more Chile symbols are displayed, the larger the amount to be added. Become.

[Data table during normal ART]
Subsequently, the data table normally used during ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124. The data tables shown in FIGS. 123 and 124 are stored in the main ROM 94 of the main control board 71.

<Flag conversion lottery table during ART>
FIG. 123 is an ART flag conversion lottery table used for the flag conversion lottery performed during the normal ART of the second embodiment. The flag conversion lottery table during ART defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination, the ART level, and the lottery state. The ART level is information controlled in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and the lottery state is information controlled in the same manner as in the CT lottery state in the first embodiment.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the main control board 71 converts the combination “F_single chili lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chili lip 4” into the combination “chili lip” by using the flag conversion lottery table during ART. Lottery (flag conversion lottery) whether or not to do. Then, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the sub-control board 72 notifies the correct pressing order for each winning combination via the display unit 100, and when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the sub-control board 72 notifies the winning order. The sub-control board 72 notifies the wrong answer pressing order for each winning combination via the display unit 100.

<Additional lottery table during normal ART>
Subsequently, FIG. 124 is an additional lottery table during the normal ART used for the additional lottery for adding the number of ART games played during the normal ART of the second embodiment. Normally, the additional lottery table during ART defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the additional lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the main control board 71 wins the flag conversion lottery, the additional lottery is performed by using the additional lottery table during the normal ART, and when the additional lottery is won, the additional lottery is performed. Add the corresponding number of additional games (add to the ART end game number counter). In addition, the information of the lottery value associated with the winning combination "single chili lip" in the figure is that the internal winning combination at the time of winning the flag conversion lottery is the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_single chili lip 4". The lottery value information associated with the winning combination "double chili lip" is referred to in the case, and the internal winning combination at the time of winning the flag conversion lottery is the role "F_2 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_2 consecutive chili lip 4". The lottery value information that is referred to in a certain case and is associated with the winning combination "triple chili lip" is that the internal winning combination when winning the flag conversion lottery is the role "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4". Referenced when is.

[Flow of games during CT]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 125, the flow of the game during CT of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is significantly different from the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in the method of managing the duration of CT. As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the main control board 71 manages the duration of CT by playing eight times in one set, but the pachislot machine of the second embodiment. In 1, the main control board 71 is based on the number of medals paid out during CT (more specifically, the so-called “difference number” obtained by subtracting the “number of medals used for the game” from the “number of medals paid out”). Manage the duration of CT.

Specifically, the main control board 71 ends the CT when the difference number of sheets in the CT reaches the end number (50 sheets) (for example, notifies to win the MB when the winning combination "pushing order bell" is won. ).
Here, when the combination of the "bell" and "cactus" symbols is displayed, nine medals are paid out, so when the combination of the "bell" symbols is displayed during CT (more specifically, CT). If the flag conversion lottery is not won during the process), the difference number (6 sheets) for which the duration of CT has increased is consumed.
On the other hand, when a combination of "cactus" symbols is displayed during CT (more specifically, when a flag conversion lottery is won during CT), the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment. Now, maintain the duration of CT.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 125 (A), the main control board 71 performs a flag conversion lottery when the winning combination "pushing order bell" is determined as the internal winning combination during CT. When the flag conversion lottery is won, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display the combination of the "cactus" symbols for each winning combination via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. When notified and the flag conversion lottery is not won, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display a combination of "bell" symbols for each winning combination via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Notify the push order.

Then, when the combination of the symbols of "bell" or "cactus" is displayed, the main control board 71 increases the number of difference sheets by 6, and the duration of CT is exhausted, but the flag conversion lottery is won. If so, the main control board 71 adds 6 to not only the difference number but also the end number of CT. As a result, although the difference in the number of sheets during CT increased by 6 due to the display of the combination of the symbols of "cactus", the number of sheets at the end of CT also increased by 6, so if the flag conversion lottery is won, CT The duration of will be maintained.

The flag conversion lottery is performed based on the value of the CT meter. That is, as shown in FIG. 125 (A), the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment is provided with a plurality of stages of CT meters from "1" to "MAX", and the lower the CT meter, the more the flag conversion lottery is won. The higher the CT meter, the higher the probability of winning the flag conversion lottery.

This CT meter is promoted or demoted based on the result of the game during CT. That is, the main control board 71 promotes the CT meter with a predetermined probability when the combination “F_single chili lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chili lip 4” is determined as the internal winning combination during CT. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125 (B), the main control board 71 is the lowest when the combination “F_single chili lip 1” to “F_single chili lip 4” is determined as the internal winning combination during CT. If the CT meter is promoted with a probability and the roles "F_2 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_2 consecutive chili lip 4" are determined as internal winning roles during CT, the CT meter is promoted with the next lowest probability and the role is used during CT. When "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" are determined as internal winning combinations, the CT meter is promoted with the highest probability.

Further, if the main control board 71 does not win the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning the winning combination "pushing order bell" during CT, the CT meter is demoted. In the case where the flag conversion lottery is not won, the main control board 71 may demote the CT meter with a predetermined probability, or may always demote the CT meter.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" are determined as internal winning roles during CT, the number of ART games is added. The amount of additional ART games varies depending on the number of displayed dust symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125 (C), the main control board 71 is used during CT to serve as "F_single dust lip 1". "-" F_single chili lip 4 "is determined as the internal winning combination, the minimum amount of addition is determined, and the roles" F_2 consecutive chili lip 1 "to" F_2 consecutive chili lip 4 "are determined as the internal winning combination during CT. And the next smallest additional amount is determined, and when the combination "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination during CT, the largest additional amount is determined.

[Data table during CT]
Subsequently, the data table used during CT will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 128. The data tables shown in FIGS. 126 to 128 are stored in the main ROM 94 of the main control board 71.

<Flag conversion lottery table during CT>
FIG. 126 is a CT flag conversion lottery table used for the flag conversion lottery performed during CT of the second embodiment. The flag conversion lottery table during CT defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination and the CT meter.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the main control board 71 uses the flag conversion lottery table during ART to change the combinations “F_pushing order bell 1” to “F_pushing order bell 6” to “cactus”. Lottery (flag conversion lottery) whether or not to convert. Then, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display a combination of "cactus" symbols for each winning combination via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. When the push order is notified and the flag conversion lottery is not won, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 combine the symbols of "bell" for each winning combination via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Notifies the pressing order for displaying.

Here, referring to FIG. 126, it can be seen that the higher the value of the CT meter, the easier it is to win the flag conversion lottery during CT, and when the CT meter is "MAX", the flag conversion lottery is always won. You can see that. When the flag conversion lottery is won, the duration of CT is maintained. Therefore, when the CT meter is "MAX", CT continues without ending. If the CT is not completed, the profit given to the player will be excessive. Therefore, when the CT meter reaches "MAX", the CT meter may be demoted at a predetermined timing, and the upper limit of the number of completed CT meters may be used. It may be provided, or both the demotion of the CT meter and the upper limit of the number of finished sheets may be applied.

When demoting a CT meter, if it is demoted immediately after being promoted to "MAX", the interest of the player will be impaired. Therefore, the CT meter may be demoted at a predetermined timing after the CT meter reaches "MAX". Here, since the CT meter is provided in eight stages from "1" to "MAX", for example, the CT meter is demoted after eight games have been performed since the CT meter became "MAX". Alternatively, the CT meter may be demoted after the flag conversion lottery has been performed eight times after the CT meter has reached "MAX". Further, the value of the CT meter after demotion is arbitrary, for example, it may be demoted to the CT meter "1", it may be demoted to the CT meter "7", and the CT meter "1" may be demoted. The value of the demoted destination may be determined by lottery from among "7".

<CT meter promotion lottery table during CT>
FIG. 127 is a CT meter promotion lottery table during CT used for the CT meter promotion lottery performed during CT of the second embodiment. The CT meter promotion lottery table during CT defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the promotion lottery of the CT meter in association with the current CT meter value and the internal winning combination.

With reference to FIG. 127, the probability of winning the promotion lottery of the CT meter is the lowest for the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_single chili lip 4", and the roles "F_2 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_2 consecutive chili lip 4". It can be seen that the next lowest is the combination "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4". In the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the CT meter is promoted one step at a time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of steps may be promoted at one time.

<Additional lottery table during CT>
Subsequently, FIG. 128 is an additional lottery table during CT used for the additional lottery for adding the number of ART games performed during the CT of the second embodiment. The additional lottery table during CT defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the additional lottery in association with the internal winning combination. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the main control board 71 performs an additional lottery using the additional lottery table during CT, and when the additional lottery is won, the corresponding number of additional games is added ( Add to the ART end game counter).

With reference to FIG. 128, the additional amount of the number of ART games during CT is the smallest for the roles “F_single chili lip 1” to “F_single chili lip 4”, and the roles “F_2 consecutive chili lip 1” to “F_2 consecutive chili lip 4”. It can be seen that the number of roles is the second lowest, and the roles "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" are the most. More specifically, in the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_single chili lip 4" in which one chili symbol is displayed, the number of ART games of 10 games or more is added, and two chili symbols are displayed. In "F_2 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_2 consecutive chili lip 4", the number of ART games of 20 games or more is added, and in the role "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" in which three chili symbols are displayed, The number of ART games of 30 games or more will be added. That is, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the number of ART games is added according to the number of Chilean symbols displayed during CT.

[Flow of games during CZ]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 129, the flow of the game in the CZ of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment has CZs 1, 2, and 3 as CZs like the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the game flow of CZ3 is the same as that of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, but the game flow of CZ1 and 2 is the first embodiment. It is different from the pachislot machine 1 of.

Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, CZ1 and 2 are divided into a first half portion and a second half portion, and ranks (modes and points) having different expectations for winning an ART lottery are promoted in the first half portion. In the latter half of the game, the lottery result of the ART lottery based on the rank is notified by the battle effect (see FIG. 54). As shown in FIG. 129, the basic flow in such CZs 1 and 2 is the same for the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment.

On the other hand, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is significantly different from the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in the termination conditions of the first half. That is, in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the first half of CZ1 and 2 is terminated based on the number of continuous games, but in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the CZ1 is a continuous game. The first half is finished based on the number, but CZ2 finishes the first half based on the result of the end lottery. Further, both CZ1 and CZ1 and 2 perform a lock lottery in the first half, and even if the lock lottery is won, the first half of CZ1 and 2 is terminated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 129 (A), in the first half of CZ1, the main control board 71 performs a rank-up lottery every game. Since this rank-up lottery is the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIG. 57), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the first half of the CZ1, the main control board 71 performs a lock lottery every game. This lock lottery is a process of drawing whether or not to perform a game lock based on the internal winning combination. Then, when the main control board 71 wins the lock lottery, it terminates the first half of the CZ1 and locks the game (for example, delays the start of rotation at the start of reel rotation). On the other hand, in the case of non-winning of the lock lottery, the main control board 71 does not end the first half of the CZ1 and continues the first half of the CZ1 until the first half of the CZ1 has passed 15 games.

Then, when the first half of the CZ1 has passed 15 games or won the lock lottery, the main control board 71 ends the first half of the CZ1 and shifts to the second half. In the latter half of CZ1, the main control board 71 performs ART lottery based on the rank obtained as a result of the rank-up lottery in the first half. Since this ART lottery is also the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 59 (A) and 59 (C)), detailed description thereof will be omitted, but when the main control board 71 is won by the lock lottery. Make sure to win the ART lottery. If the ART lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts to the normal gaming state, and if the ART lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts to the ART gaming state via ART preparation. ..

On the other hand, in the first half of CZ2, as shown in FIG. 129 (B), the main control board 71 performs a rank-up lottery every game. Since this rank-up lottery is the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIG. 58), detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the main control board 71 performs an end lottery for each game in the first half of the CZ1, and when the end lottery is won, the first half of the CZ1 is ended and the latter half is moved to the end lottery, but the end lottery is not performed. In the case of winning, the first half of CZ1 is continued.

Further, in the first half of the CZ2, the main control board 71 performs a lock lottery every game. Then, when the main control board 71 wins the lock lottery, the first half of the CZ2 is terminated and the game is locked. On the other hand, in the case where the lock lottery is not won, the main control board 71 does not end the first half of the CZ2, but continues the first half of the CZ2 until the end lottery is won.

Then, when the main control board 71 wins the end lottery or the lock lottery, the main control board 71 ends the first half portion of the CZ2 and shifts to the second half portion. In the latter half of CZ2, the main control board 71 performs ART lottery based on the rank obtained as a result of the rank-up lottery in the first half. Since this ART lottery is also the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 59 (B) and 59 (C)), detailed description thereof will be omitted, but when the main control board 71 is won by the lock lottery. Make sure to win the ART lottery.
If the ART lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts to the normal gaming state, and if the ART lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts to the ART gaming state via ART preparation. ..

As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is different from the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in that lock lottery is performed every game in the first half of CZ1 and CZ1 and 2. Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the end condition of the first half of the CZ2 is not the number of continuous games but the end lottery, so that the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment is different from the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment. different.

[Data table in CZ]
Subsequently, the data table used in CZ will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. The data tables shown in FIGS. 130 and 131 are stored in the main ROM 94 of the main control board 71.

<CZ2 end lottery table>
FIG. 130 is a CZ2 end lottery table used for the end lottery performed in the first half of CZ2 of the second embodiment. The CZ2 end lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the end lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

Referring to FIG. 130, in the first half of CZ2 of the second embodiment, when the combination "replay" is determined as the internal winning combination, the end lottery is performed, and the end lottery is won with high probability. You can see that. Since CZ2 is basically performed during the RT0 to RT3 gaming states, the combination "replay" is any of the combination "F_maintenance lip A" to "F_RT4 lip_3rd". In the pachislot machine, the replay is determined as an internal winning combination with a probability of at least a predetermined value (about 1 / 7.3) or more, so that in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the first half of the CZ2 ends. It turns out that the situation occurs relatively often.

<Lock lottery table>
Subsequently, FIG. 131 is a lock lottery table used for the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ1 and 2 of the second embodiment, and FIG. 131 (A) shows a lock used for the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ1. It is a lottery table, and FIG. 131 (B) is a lock lottery table used for a lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ2. The lock lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the lock lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

Comparing FIGS. 131 (A) and 131 (B), it can be seen that the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ2 has a higher probability of winning than the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ1.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the first half of CZ1 ends when a predetermined number of games (15 games) have elapsed, while the first half of CZ2 ends when the end lottery is won. Further, in the first half of CZ1 and 2, a rank-up lottery is performed, and when the first half of CZ1, 2 is completed, an ART lottery is performed based on the result of this rank-up lottery. Therefore, it can be said that CZ1 is a chance zone in which the timing of ART lottery is fixed, and CZ2 is a chance zone in which the timing of ART lottery is indefinite.

In addition, since the end lottery performed in the first half of CZ2 is performed when the winning combination "replay" is determined as the internal winning combination with a relatively high probability, the rank-up lottery is performed during CZ2 as compared with that during CZ1. It is easy to receive less chance. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the lock lottery is performed in the first half of the CZ1 and 2, and the probability of winning the lock lottery is higher in the CZ2 than in the CZ1. As a result, even CZ2, which tends to receive less chance of receiving a rank-up lottery, can be expected to shift to ART.

[Modified example of the second embodiment]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment has been described above. Subsequently, a modified example of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described.

<CT precursor game and notification lottery>
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment described above, in order to facilitate understanding, when shifting between the MB flags during normal ART, the transition to CT is immediately performed from the next game, but between the MB flags. After shifting to, a predetermined number of precursor games may be inserted.

As shown in FIG. 132 (A), when the MB is normally determined as the internal winning combination during ART, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from between the MB non-flags and between the MB flags. During normal ART (between MB non-flags), the number of ART games will be added if the role "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" is won in the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning (see FIG. 124). The flag conversion lottery until the transition between the MB flags is performed is performed on the main side (main control board 71) because it affects the privilege given to the player.

Here, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, since the combination of the symbols of "chili lip" is always displayed regardless of the pressing order between the MB flags, it was decided to perform the precursory game during the MB flags. In this case, the player may know from the stop control (combination of displayed symbols) that the precursory game is in progress. For example, as shown in FIG. 121, during the MB non-flag, the combination of the symbols of "chili lip" is not displayed by pressing forward when the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" is won. , When the combination of the symbols of "Chililip" is displayed by pressing forward, the player knows that it is during the MB flag (during the precursory game).

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modified example, when the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination during the MB flag, the push order is intentionally notified. As described above, when the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination during the MB flag, the combination of the symbols of "chili lip" is displayed regardless of the pressing order. However, when the push order is notified, the player recognizes that the combination of the "chili lip" symbols is displayed by the notified push order, and the player is in the middle of the MB flags. It can be difficult to grasp.

Since such notification of the push order does not affect the profit of the player in any way, in the pachislot machine 1 of this modified example, a lottery (notification) as to whether or not to notify the push order during the MB flag is drawn. Lottery) is performed on the sub (sub control board 72) side. Of course, the notification lottery between the MB flags may be performed on the main side, but by performing the lottery that does not affect the profit of the player as in this modification on the sub side, the data capacity on the main side It is suitable because it can reduce the processing load.

FIG. 132 (B) is a notification lottery table in the CT precursor used for the notification lottery performed on the sub side, and is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76. The notification lottery table in the CT precursor defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the notification lottery performed on the sub side in association with the internal winning combination.

When the notification lottery using the notification lottery table in the CT precursor is won, the sub-control board 72 notifies an arbitrary push order other than the forward push via the display unit 100.

<Navigation when the push order bell between MB flags is won>
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment described above, when the winning combination "pushing order bell" is won during the MB flag, more kinds of symbol combinations are displayed than during the MB non-flag. Specifically, while the MB non-flags are displayed, the combination of "bell" and "bell spilled eyes or the first sheet" is displayed according to the pressing order, while during the MB flags, "bell" is displayed according to the pressing order. The combination of the symbols of "bell", "cactus", "MB", "bell spilled eye or first piece" is displayed. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the pressing order required to display the combination of "cactus" symbols that can be displayed only between the MB flags is notified during the CT during the MB flags. It is said.

In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modified example, when the winning combination "pushing order bell" is won between the MB flags, the notification content is changed according to the state until the start of the MB.

Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when MB is normally determined as an internal winning combination during ART, the gaming state shifts between the MB flags, and then CT is performed. In this case, in the pachi-slot machine 1 that sandwiches a predetermined number of precursor games after shifting between the MB flags, the states during the MB flags are divided into a “precursor game” state, a “CT” state, and a “MB waiting” state. be able to.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 133, when the MB is hit during the normal ART, the state becomes a "precursor game" between the MB flags, and then a predetermined number of premonition games are performed and the CT is started. It goes into the "CT" state during the MB flag, and then goes into the "MB waiting" state until the MB wins when the CT ends.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modified example, the notification content at the time of winning the combination "pushing order bell" is different depending on the state between these MB flags. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 133, in the "precursor game" state, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display a combination of "bell" symbols via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Notify the push order. Further, in the "CT" state, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the pressing order in which the combination of the "bell" or "cactus" symbols is displayed via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. That is, in the "CT" state, the push order corresponding to either "bell" or "cactus" is notified based on the result of the flag conversion lottery based on the CT meter as described above.

In the "MB standby" state after the CT is completed, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 may notify the arbitrary combination of symbols via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. For example, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 may notify the push order in which the combination of the “bell” symbols is displayed, or the push order in which the combination of the “cactus” symbols is displayed. It may be notified, or it may be notified of the pressing order in which the combination of "MB" symbols is displayed.

On the other hand, since the combination of the "cactus" symbols cannot be displayed during normal ART, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the pressing order in which the combination of the "bell" symbols is displayed.

[Effect of the pachislot machine of the second embodiment]
The second embodiment of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described above. According to such a pachislot machine 1, the following effects can be expected.

(Combination of symbols that can be displayed between the MB flags)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, more kinds of symbol combinations can be displayed during the MB flag than during the MB non-flag when the winning combination "pushing order bell" is won. Specifically, the combination of "bell", "bell spilled eyes or the first piece" is displayed according to the pressing order between the MB non-flags, while it is displayed according to the pressing order during the MB flags. The combination of the symbols of "bell", "cactus", "MB", "bell spilled eye or first piece" is displayed.

As a result, it is possible to increase the types of combinations of symbols displayed between the MB flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and it is possible to give diversity to the games between the MB flags.
Specifically, it is now possible to display a combination of "cactus" symbols corresponding to the so-called rare role between the MB flags, and the appearance frequency of the rare role without changing the type of winning role and the winning probability. Can be enhanced. In particular, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, since the combination of the symbols displayed at the time of winning the combination "pushing order bell" is changed, it is possible to increase the frequency of appearance of the rare combination with the payout of medals. ..

If the combination of "cactus" symbols is continuously displayed between the MB flags, it will be known that the combination is between the MB flags. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combination of the "cactus" symbols is notified only when the flag conversion lottery is won, and the combination of the "bell" symbols is notified in the case of non-winning. To do. This makes it difficult for the player to understand the current state, which is preferable. In addition, by controlling the notification content by the flag conversion lottery, the frequency of the symbol combination (rare role) of the "cactus" between the MB flags can be adjusted, and the playability between the MB flags can be diversified. Can be done.

(Playability during CT)
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, CT, which is an additional chance zone for adding the number of ART games, is performed between the MB flags. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, CT is continuously performed during the MB flags until the difference number reaches the end number (50 sheets). During this CT, if you do not win the flag conversion lottery when you win the role "push order bell", the difference number will increase and the duration of CT will be exhausted, while if you win the flag conversion lottery, the number of ends will increase as the difference number increases. Increases and the duration of CT is maintained. As a result, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the CT is changed according to the combination of the displayed symbols (specifically, according to the result of the flag conversion lottery) while changing the stop control during the MB flag. Since the duration of the game can be controlled, the playability between the MB flags can be diversified.

At this time, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, since the probability of winning the flag conversion lottery is controlled based on the value of the CT meter, the duration of CT is adjusted based on the value of the CT meter. can do. In addition, this CT meter is promoted when the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" are determined as internal winning roles during CT, and is demoted when the winning combination is not won in the inter-flag lottery during CT. The player will be keenly interested in the result of the game during CT, and the game playability between the MB flags can be diversified.

In particular, if the CT meter can be promoted to "MAX", the flag conversion lottery will always be won for a predetermined period of time, so that expectations can be placed on subsequent games, and the interest of the game is high. Is improved.

(Combination of symbols that can be displayed between MB flags and MB non-flags)
Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, not only the combination of the symbols displayed at the time of winning the combination "pushing order bell" is different between the MB flag interval and the MB non-flag interval, but also the combination "F_ The combination of symbols displayed at the time of winning "single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip" is also different. That is, while the MB non-flags are displayed, the combination of "replay" or "chili lip" symbols is displayed depending on the pressing order, while the combination of "replay" symbols is displayed during the MB flags. Only the combination of the "Chililip" symbols is displayed.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the flag conversion lottery is performed both between the MB flags and between the MB non-flags. The flag conversion lottery between the MB flags is to draw the target to be notified at the time of winning the role "pushing order bell" from the combination of the symbols of "bell" or "cactus", and also during the MB non-flags. The flag conversion lottery is to draw the target to be notified at the time of winning the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip" from the combination of the symbols of "replay" or "chili lip". By performing the flag conversion lottery between both the MB flags and the MB non-flags in this way, it is possible to control the combination of the displayed symbols both between the MB flags and the MB non-flags. It is possible to enhance the playability of both flags and non-flags.

At this time, the winning probability of the flag conversion lottery between the MB flags is adjusted based on the value of the CT meter, and the winning probability of the flag conversion lottery between the MB non-flags is adjusted based on the ART level and the lottery state. The flag. As a result, each lottery can be managed in its own mode, and the playability based on the flag conversion lottery is improved.

(Notification lottery on the sub side)
Since the stop control is different between the MB flags and the MB non-flags, it may be known from the combination of the displayed symbols that the MB flags are in the middle. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the originally unnecessary push order is intentionally notified during the MB flags, and it is difficult to grasp that the push order is between the MB flags. Then, by managing the notification of the push order on the sub side, the data capacity and the processing load on the main side can be reduced.

[Modification example]
Although the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment has been described above, the present invention is not limited thereto.

(Bernavi between flags and Bellnavi between non-flags)
For example, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, notification is performed on the main side by displaying a numerical value uniquely corresponding to the stop operation information on the instruction monitor. Since the mode of notification on the main side is basically the same in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, an example thereof is shown in FIG. 78 of the first embodiment. Here, in FIG. 78, while "white 7 navigation" and "blue 7 navigation" are performed during the inter-flag state, "bell navigation" and the like are not performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the inter-flag state is performed. You may perform "Bell Navi" or the like during the state.

In this case, the numerical value displayed on the instruction monitor may be different between the flag-to-flag state and the non-flag-to-flag state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 78 (A) and 78 (B), when "Bell Navi" is performed in the non-flag state, numerical values "1" to "3" (pushing order second instruction information) are displayed on the instruction monitor. ) Is displayed, as shown in FIG. 134, when "Bell Navi" is performed in the state between flags, numerical values of "12" to "14" are displayed on the instruction monitor (pushing order first instruction information).
May be displayed. The navigation on the sub side performed via the display unit 100 may be common to both the flag-to-flag state and the non-flag-to-flag state. The same applies to the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, and if the numerical value when "Bell Navi" is performed during the MB non-flag and the numerical value when "Bell Navi" is performed during the MB flag are different. You may let it.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, it is determined to control whether or not the privilege is given based on the result of the flag conversion lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. ..
That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the notification content is controlled based on the result of the flag conversion lottery, and as a result, it is displayed when the notification-following stop operation is performed. The combination of symbols will be different. Therefore, the main control board 71 may give a privilege based on the combination of the actually displayed symbols.

In this case, the main control board 71 grants a privilege based on the combination of symbols displayed based on the notification performed according to the result of the flag conversion lottery, and is based on the combination of symbols displayed without following the notification. Therefore, the privilege may not be given. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the combination of the symbols displayed according to the pressing order is different, so that the player ignores the notification and performs the stop operation. In that case, there is a possibility that a special combination of symbols such as "triple chili lip" will be displayed. However, even if a special symbol combination is displayed as a result of ignoring the notification, the privilege is given only when the special symbol combination is displayed as a result of following the notification without giving the privilege. It may be that.

(Control of notification that does not affect profits (privileges))
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, whether the notification that affects the profit is notified on the main side by performing a notification lottery (flag conversion lottery) and on the main side. It is decided to control whether or not, and for the notification that does not affect the profit, the notification lottery is performed on the sub side, and whether or not the notification is performed on the sub side is controlled. Then, as an example of the notification that does not affect the profit, the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment shows the notification of the “reach eye lip” during the precursory game, and the pachislot machine according to the second embodiment shows the notification. Machine 1 shows the notification of "chili lip" between the MB flags. In this respect, notifications that do not affect profits are not limited to these.

In recent pachislot machines, the game may be changed to a state in which it is easy (difficult) to lock the game according to the order of stop operations. For example, when the push order is "left, middle, right", the game is easily locked, and when the push order is "right, middle, left", the game is difficult to lock. There is. In such a pachislot machine, by notifying the push order, it is possible to shift to a state in which it is easy (difficult) to lock the game, but if whether or not to lock the game affects the profit, , While it is necessary to control this notification on the main side, if whether or not to lock the game does not affect the profit, this notification may be controlled on the sub side.

In addition, when whether or not the game lock is performed affects the profit, for example, the game lock is performed as in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, and the ART lottery is won. This is the case (see FIG. 129). On the other hand, the case where whether or not the game lock is performed does not affect the profit is the case where the game lock is performed as an effect. For example, during a precursory game in which it is decided to give a profit (privilege). By making the game lock frequently, it is to show that the profit will be given in the subsequent game.

FIG. 135 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence between the push order and the locked state. In the example shown in FIG. 135 (A), when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "left, middle, right" when the winning combination "F_maintenance lip A" is won, the lock state changes from "0" to "1". , "Left, right, middle" "middle, left, right" "middle, right, left" When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order, the current locked state is maintained, "right, left, middle" "right" When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of ", middle, left", the lock state changes from "1" to "0". Similarly, the same applies when the winning combination "F_Maintenance Lip B" is won, and when the stop operation is performed in the first pressing order, the lock state changes from "0" to "1", and in the second pressing order. When the stop operation is performed, the locked state is maintained, and when the stop operation is performed in the third pressing order, the locked state changes from "1" to "0".

In the example shown in FIG. 135 (A), in order to simplify the explanation, the locked state "0" is set to a state in which it is difficult to lock the game, and the locked state "1" is set to a state in which the game is easily locked. Of course, the locked state is not limited to two stages, and may be a number of stages of three or more stages, and in the case of three or more stages, the transition may be performed in multiple stages at once instead of transitioning one stage at a time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 135 (B), when the game lock affects the profit, a notification lottery for whether or not to perform notification is performed on the main (main control board 71) side, and the lottery result is used. Based on this, both the main side and the sub side notify the predetermined push order. On the other hand, when the game lock does not affect the profit, a notification lottery for whether or not to perform notification is performed on the sub (sub-control board 72) side, and a predetermined push order is performed on the sub side based on the lottery result. Is notified.

Depending on the pachislot machine, there are pachislot machines in which the game lock affects the profit for the entire period of the game, and there are pachislot machines in which the game lock does not affect the profit for the entire period of the game. In some pachislot machines, the game lock affects the profit during a predetermined period, while the game lock does not affect the profit during a specific period of the game. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, during the period when the game lock affects the profit, a notification lottery for whether or not to perform notification is performed on the main side, and a predetermined push is performed on both the main side and the sub side based on the lottery result. While notifying the order, during the period when the game lock affects the profit, the sub side performs a notification lottery as to whether or not to notify, and the sub side notifies the predetermined push order based on the lottery result. May be.

Since the game lock is normally performed by the main control board 71, the main control board 71 has a function of transitioning the lock state according to the push order shown in FIG. 135 (A). That is, the main control board 71 draws a lottery whether or not to lock the game with a probability according to the lock state setting means for setting the lock state based on the order of the detected stop operations and the lock state set by the lock state setting means. When it is determined that the game lock determination means determines the game lock and the game lock determination means performs the game lock, the game lock determination means functions as a lock execution means for temporarily stopping the progress of the game. Then, the main control board 71 or the sub control board 72 is a notification lottery means for performing a notification lottery as to whether or not to notify the push order in which the lock state setting means sets the lock state in which the game lock is easy (difficult). , And, it functions as a notification means for notifying a predetermined push order based on the lottery result of the notification lottery means.

(Normally ART and CT termination conditions)
Normally, the termination conditions for ART and CT are not limited to those described above, and any termination conditions can be adopted. For example, the number of medals awarded during normal ART or CT, the number of unit games during normal ART or CT, the number of times that information advantageous to the player is notified during normal ART or CT, and the predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games). ) Can be used as one set, and any end condition such as the number of sets and the continuation rate at the end of one set can be adopted.

Further, as the number of medals given during normal ART or CT, for example, the difference number (net increase number) obtained by subtracting the number of medals used in the game from the number of medals paid out in the same game is used. May be. In addition, the number of medals given during normal ART or CT may be calculated based on the actually increased medals (calculation based on the actual value), and notification is given regardless of whether or not the number has actually increased. It may be calculated based on the number of medals to be increased according to the above (calculation based on the ideal value). In addition, the number of medals awarded may not be increased depending on the type of internal winning combination. For example, for some of the winning combinations that are unlikely to be determined as the internal winning combination, or for the combination that shows / hides the combination of symbols according to the timing of the stop operation, the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. However, the number of medals awarded may not be increased or decreased.

(Type of notification (press order, timing))
In addition, the content of the notification normally performed during ART or CT is also arbitrary, and the order of the stop operations (pushing order) in which the combination of symbols advantageous to the player is displayed may be notified, and the combination of the symbols may be notified. May be notified of the timing of the stop operation (design to be aimed at) required for displaying.

(Other)
In addition, as an advantageous state, the winning probability of the internal winning combination related to the re-game is not changed (or changed within a range that does not affect the game playability), and the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. It is also possible to use the so-called "AT", which activates the re-game high probability state (replay time) in which the winning probability of the internal winning combination related to the re-game is high, and the stop operation which is advantageous for the player. The so-called "ART" that notifies the aspect may be used.

In the embodiment of the present invention described above, various control processes have been described separately as a main control process executed by the main CPU 93 and a sub control process executed by the sub CPU 102, but various types included in the sub control process. The main CPU 93 may execute the process, or the sub CPU 102 may execute various processes included in the main control process.

Further, in the embodiment of the present invention, when the stop operation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is notified, the stop order of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is notified, but each reel 3L, The stop positions of the 3C and 3R may be notified, or the combination of the stop order and the stop position of the reels 3L, 3C and 3R may be notified.

Further, in the embodiment of the present invention, an example in which the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to the pachislot machine 1 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine according to the present invention uses a gaming ball as a gaming medium. It can also be applied to other gaming machines such as the pachinko gaming machine used.

[Gist of the invention]
In a game machine that drives a movable accessory for production by using an accessory driving means such as a motor as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-108148, the movable accessory is stopped. However, when the movable accessory is stopped while the accessory drive means is excited, there is a problem that the aged deterioration of the accessory drive means progresses.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a movable accessory (for example, reel screen mechanism F1), an accessory driving means for driving the movable accessory (for example, a drive motor F21), and a drive for controlling the accessory driving means. A control means (sub CPU 102) is provided, and the movable accessory can be stopped without exciting the accessory driving means, and an excitation stop position that can be stopped by exciting the accessory driving means. The drive control means starts measuring the excitation stop time and stops the excitation by controlling the accessory drive means so as to stop the movable accessory at the excitation stop position. When the specified time (for example, 65,000 ms) has elapsed, the accessory driving means is controlled so as to move the movable accessory to the stationary position, and when the movable accessory moves to the stationary position, the above-mentioned It has a configuration in which the accessory driving means is controlled to a non-excited state after the accessory driving means is excited and stopped for a predetermined time (motor control direction is “H”, 100 ms).

With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in order to prevent the movable accessory from being stopped in the excited state of the accessory driving means for more than a specified time, the deterioration of the accessory driving means over time progresses. Can be suppressed. As a result, the gaming machine according to the present invention can suppress a failure due to the progress of aged deterioration of the accessory driving means.

The gaming machine according to the present invention further includes an effect executing means (sub CPU 102) for executing an effect including the movement of the movable accessory, and the stationary position includes a first stationary position (for example, a reel standby position) and a reel standby position. When the drive control means controls the accessory driving means so as to move the movable accessory to the stationary position, the effect executing means comprises a second stationary position (for example, a reel exposed position). Depending on the effect being executed, the movable accessory may be moved to the first stationary position or the second stationary position to end the effect by the movable accessory.

With this configuration, when the game machine according to the present invention moves the movable accessory to the stationary position, the movable accessory is moved to the first stationary position or the second stationary position according to the effect being executed. , Since the production by the movable character is finished, the current production can be finished without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In a game machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459, a game machine that displays an image projected from a projection device on a screen device is produced by performing an effect while switching a plurality of screens having different shapes. Can be diversified.

However, in the conventional game machine as described above, when displaying an error image indicating an error related to the game machine on the screen, since the shapes of the plurality of screens are different from each other, the error image to be displayed and the projected screen are used. There is a problem that the visibility of the error image may be deteriorated because the images do not mesh with each other.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a video output means (projector mechanism B2) for outputting video and a plurality of display devices (fixed screen mechanism D, fixed screen mechanism D, in which at least one capable of displaying the video output by the video output means is movable. A gaming machine having a front screen mechanism E1 and a reel screen mechanism F1), a display control means (sub CPU 102) for controlling the video output means and the plurality of display devices, and the display control means is the said. An error detecting means (for example, a 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74) for detecting an error related to a game machine, and a display device specifying means (sub CPU 102) for specifying the display device on which the video output by the video output means is displayed. When an error is detected by the error detecting means, an error displaying means (executed by the sub CPU 102) for displaying an error image representing the error detected by the error detecting means on any of the plurality of display devices. (Error display processing), and the display control means has a configuration in which the video output means outputs an error image corresponding to the display device specified by the display device specifying means.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention takes the opportunity of detecting an error related to the gaming machine, and among a plurality of display devices, an error corresponding to the display device on which the video output by the video output means is displayed. Since the video is output to the video output means, the visibility of the error video can be improved.

The gaming machine according to the present invention further includes an error video storage means (rom cartridge substrate 76) for storing error video corresponding to the plurality of display devices, and the video output means is a video projection device (projector mechanism B2). ), The display control means includes a focus distance control means (step S504 of processing at the time of receiving a start command executed by the sub CPU 102) for controlling the focus distance of the video output means, and the display control means is said. From the error image stored in the error video storage means, the error video corresponding to the display device specified by the display device specifying means is output to the video output means at the focal distance controlled by the focus distance control means. It may be.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention causes the video output means to output an error video corresponding to the display device specified by the display device specifying means from the error image stored in the error video storage means. It is possible to have the video output means output an error video corresponding to the screen on which the video output by is displayed.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention further includes a sub-display device (image display device 201a) having a narrower display area than any of the plurality of display devices and is immovable, and the display control means is used as the video output means. An error image showing the same content as the error image to be output may be displayed on the sub-display device.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention can confirm an error related to the gaming machine even in a sub-display device whose display performance is stable because the display area is narrower and immovable than any of the plurality of display devices. ..

In a conventional game machine having movable accessories at a plurality of positions as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-42693, inconsistency occurs in the positional relationship when various motion controls are performed by the plurality of movable accessories. There is a problem that the movable accessory may not operate normally.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a first movable accessory (for example, front screen mechanism E1) and a second reference position (for example, reel standby position) that can move with reference to a first reference position (for example, a front standby position). A plurality of movable accessories including a second movable accessory (for example, reel screen mechanism F1) that can move with reference, a first accessory driving means for driving the first movable accessory (for example, a drive motor E25), and A second accessory driving means (for example, a drive motor F21) for driving the second accessory, and a drive control means (sub CPU 102) for controlling the first accessory driving means and the second accessory driving means. The drive control means includes the accessory position determining means (sub CPU 102) for determining whether or not the first movable accessory is in the first reference position, and the drive control means uses the second movable accessory as the first. 2 When moving from the reference position, if the accessory position determining means determines that the first movable accessory is not in the first reference position, the first accessory driving means is controlled to control the first movable accessory. It has a configuration in which the first movable accessory is moved to the first reference position.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a first movable accessory if the first movable accessory is not in the first reference position when the second movable accessory is moved from the second reference position. By moving the second movable accessory from the second reference position after moving the first movable accessory to the first reference position, the positional relationship between the first movable accessory and the second movable accessory becomes inconsistent, and these are movable. It is possible to prevent the accessory from not operating normally.

The gaming machine according to the present invention further includes an effect executing means (sub CPU 102) for executing an effect including the movement of the plurality of movable accessories, and the effect executing means uses the second movable accessory as the first. 2 When the effect of moving from the reference position is executed, if the accessory position determining means determines that the first movable accessory is not in the first reference position, the drive control means determines that the first movable accessory is not in the first reference position. After controlling the accessory driving means to move the first movable accessory to the first reference position, the second movable accessory driving means is controlled to move the second movable accessory from the second reference position. You may make it move.

With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the effect of moving the second movable accessory from the second reference position is executed, the first movable accessory is not in the first reference position by the accessory position determining means. If it is determined that, after the first movable accessory is moved to the first reference position by the drive control means, the player is given an effect of moving the second movable accessory from the second reference position. The production can be performed without giving a sense of discomfort.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the effect executing means executes the effect based on the effect data representing the effect operation and executes the effect of moving the second movable accessory from the second reference position. In addition, when it is determined by the accessory position determining means that the first movable accessory is not in the first reference position, an effect of moving the second movable accessory from the second reference position is expressed. Based on the effect data in which the effect data representing the effect of moving the first movable accessory to the first reference position is inserted before the data, and the effect data representing the effect of moving the first movable accessory to the first reference position is inserted. , The effect of moving the second movable accessory from the second reference position may be executed.

With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the effect of moving the second movable accessory from the second reference position is executed, the first movable accessory is not in the first reference position by the accessory position determining means. If it is determined that, the effect data representing the effect of moving the first movable accessory to the first reference position is inserted before the effect data representing the effect of moving the second movable accessory from the second reference position. Therefore, after the first movable accessory is moved to the first reference position by the drive control means, the effect of moving the second movable accessory from the second reference position can be executed.

A conventional gaming machine for driving a movable accessory as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-42693 by an accessory driving means such as a motor includes a movable portion of the movable accessory, an accessory driving means, and a movable portion and an accessory. Since there is a risk that the movable accessory will not operate normally due to aged deterioration of the gear mechanism between the drive means and the drive means, measures are required when the movable accessory does not operate normally.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a movable accessory (for example, a front screen mechanism E1), an accessory driving means for driving the movable accessory (for example, a drive motor E25), and a drive for controlling the accessory driving means. The control means (sub CPU 102), the accessory position determining means (sub CPU 102) for determining whether or not the movable accessory is in the reference position (for example, the front standby position or the front exposed position), and the accessory position determination. The accessory position error detecting means (sub CPU 102) for detecting an error regarding the position of the movable accessory based on the result of determination by the means is provided, and the accessory position error detecting means is provided at the start of the unit game. When the movable accessory is not in the reference position, an error is detected, and the drive control means satisfies a predetermined error condition triggered by the detection of the error by the accessory position error detecting means. In addition, it has a configuration that prohibits the driving of the movable accessory by the accessory driving means.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention prohibits the driving of the movable accessory when an error regarding the position of the movable accessory is detected, and therefore, a special case for eliminating the error regarding the position of the movable accessory. It is possible to take measures when the movable accessory does not operate normally without requiring any special processing.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention protects parts such as the movable accessory and the accessory driving means in order to prohibit the driving of the movable accessory when an error regarding the position of the movable accessory is detected. Can be done.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the predetermined error condition is that the error is continuously detected a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) by the accessory position error detecting means at the start of the unit game. It may be established.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention prohibits the driving of the movable accessory by the accessory driving means on condition that the error is detected continuously a predetermined number of times, and therefore, it is affected by disturbance or the like. It is possible to prevent the driving of the movable accessory from being prohibited when an error regarding the position of the movable accessory is erroneously detected.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the drive control means, the power is turned on to the gaming machine, or an error is not detected by the accessory position error detecting means at the start of the unit game. May be used as an opportunity to reset the number of errors detected by the accessory position error detecting means.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention eliminates an error regarding the position of a movable accessory by executing an initialization operation when the power is turned on to the gaming machine (so-called "power-on reset"). Since there are times when the power is turned on, the number of errors is reset, so the movable accessory can be operated normally without the need for special processing to eliminate the error related to the position of the movable accessory. You can take measures when it stops working.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the movable accessory is composed of a plurality of screens (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1), and an image output means (projector mechanism B2) for projecting an image on the plurality of screens. ) And the focal length control means (step S504 of the start command reception processing executed by the sub CPU 102) for controlling the focal length of the video output means, and the focal length control means is provided by the drive control means. The focal length is controlled according to the plurality of screens driven by the controlled accessory driving means, and the focal length is maintained when the driving of the movable accessory by the accessory driving means is prohibited. You may try to do it.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention maintains the focal length when the driving of the screen by the accessory driving means is prohibited, so that the visibility of the image projected on the screen is lowered. It can be suppressed.

In a game machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-135540, since a video for directing is displayed on a liquid crystal display device during a unit game, information on the game machine such as a payout table and an arrangement of symbols is displayed. There is a problem that the production is interrupted when the display is displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

The gaming machine according to the present invention responds to an image display device (201a) that displays an image, a contact input device (touch sensor 201b) that is superposed on the image display device and capable of contact input, and an operation on the contact input device. The display control means includes a display control means (sub CPU 102) for displaying an image representing the information on the image display device and a game information recording means (sub CPU 102) for recording game information representing the content of the game. In response to the operation of the contact input device, an image (top screen 212) showing information about the game is displayed on the image display device, and even during the unit game, in response to the operation of the contact input device. After displaying the user interface image (menu screen 216) for performing various operations of recording the game information by the game information recording means on the image display device, the above, in response to the operation of the contact input device, It has a configuration that enables various operations of recording game information by the game information recording means.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention is in the unit game because it is provided with an image display device capable of displaying information about the game in addition to the display means for displaying the effect video during the unit game. However, it is possible to display information about the game without interrupting the production.

In the game machine according to the present invention, various operations for recording game information by the game information recording means start recording game information by the game information recording means and record the game information by the game information recording means. The operation of referring to the above and ending the recording of the game information by the game information recording means may be possible.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention starts recording game information, refers to recording game information, and records game information in response to an operation of a contact input device even during a unit game. The end can be executed by the player.

In a game machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-167192, the design of the decorative sheet is difficult to see when the light source is turned off. For this reason, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult for the player to understand where the lighting state is before and when the gaming state shifts to a predetermined gaming state.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a display means (display unit 100) for displaying an image, a protective cover (20) provided in front of the display means and capable of visually recognizing the image displayed on the display means, and the above. A decorative portion (22a, 22b) arranged inside the protective cover and decorated with a pattern indicating a game state, a light source (decorative LED 23a, 23b) that irradiates light from the back surface of the decorative portion, and a lighting state of the light source. The light source control means includes a light source control means (sub CPU 102) for controlling the above, and the light source control means shifts the gaming state to the predetermined gaming state when the gaming state has not shifted to the predetermined gaming state. Compared with the state, the light source is turned on with a low brightness, and the pattern decorated on the decorative portion has a configuration that can be visually recognized from the outside of the protective cover even if the light source is turned on with a low brightness.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention can visually recognize the pattern decorated on the decorative portion by turning on the light source of the decorative portion with low brightness even if the gaming state has not shifted to the predetermined gaming state. In order to make it easier, it is possible to make it easier for the player to know where the light is turned on when the gaming state shifts to a predetermined gaming state.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the protective cover may have a light-shielding property against light incident from the outside to the inside.

With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the protective cover has a light-shielding property against light incident from the outside to the inside, the visibility of the image displayed on the display means by the external light is lowered. It can be suppressed.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the light source is turned off, the light source control means converts the light source data for turning off the light source into light source data for turning on the light source with a predetermined low brightness, and converts the data. The lighting state of the light source may be controlled based on the light source data.

With this configuration, when the light source is turned off, the gaming machine according to the present invention converts the light source data for turning off the light source into light source data for turning on the light source with a predetermined low brightness, and based on the converted light source data, In order to control the lighting state of the light source, it is possible to light the light source with low brightness during the period when the light source is required to be turned off by simply converting the light source data.

The gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-146523 promotes the operation of the effect button for advancing the effect by lighting the LED provided on the effect button. The gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-17972 has displayed an image on a liquid crystal display device for notifying the timing of operating the effect button.

In such a conventional game machine, by lighting the LED provided on the effect button for advancing the effect, the operation of the effect button is promoted, and an image for notifying the timing of operating the effect button is displayed on the liquid crystal display. When displaying on a display means such as a device, if the state of the LED provided on the effect button and the image displayed on the display means are not linked, the player may feel uncomfortable.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a display means (display unit 100) for displaying an effect image, an effect operation means (chance button 33) used for the effect, and an effect operation light source provided in the effect operation means (display unit 100). The chance button LED34), the effect determining means (sub CPU 102) that determines the effect according to the progress of the game, and the effect operation display means (sub CPU 102) that causes the display means to display an image corresponding to the effect determined by the effect determining means. The sub CPU 102) and the effect operation detection means (chance switch 35) for detecting the operation of the effect operation means are provided, and the effect determined by the effect operation display means triggered by the operation of the effect operation means. When determined by the means, the display means displays an image prompting the operation of the effect operation means, the effect operation light source is turned on, and the operation of the effect operation means is detected by the effect operation detection means. In this case, the display means is configured to end the display of the image prompting the operation of the effect operation means and turn off the effect operation light source.

With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the light emission of the effect operation light source provided in the effect operation means and the display of the image prompting the operation of the effect operation means are linked, and the effect operation light source is turned off and the effect operation is performed. Since the end of the display of the image for prompting the operation of the means is linked, the operation for directing can be promoted without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the effect determining means determines an effect triggered by the operation of the effect operating means based on a predetermined lottery value and a random number value for lottery, and determines the effect. When the effect triggered by the operation of the effect operating means is determined by the effect determining means, the display means imitates the shape of the effect operating means in a substantially central area of the display area of the display means. The image may be displayed.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention determines the effect triggered by the operation of the effect operation means based on a predetermined lottery value and a random number value for lottery, so that the operation of the effect operation means is performed. The triggering effect can be executed at an appropriate frequency.

Further, when the gaming machine according to the present invention executes an effect triggered by the operation of the effect operation means, it displays an image imitating the shape of the effect operation means in a substantially central area of the display area of the display means. Therefore, it is possible to visually promote the operation of the effect operation means in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the conventional game machine as described above, when the effect button is not operated and an operation effective for the progress of the game is performed even though the operation of the effect button is urged, the effect button is used. There is a problem that the effect of being operated is not executed, and the player's interest cannot be improved by the effect.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a display means (display unit 100) for displaying a production image, a production operation means (chance button 33) used for the production, and a production determination that determines the production according to the progress of the game. The display means displays the means (sub CPU 102), the effect executing means (sub CPU 102) for executing the effect determined by the effect determining means, and the image corresponding to the effect determined by the effect determining means. The display means (sub CPU 102) and the effect operation detection means (chance switch 35) for detecting the operation of the effect operation means are provided, and the effect image display means is triggered by the operation of the effect operation means. When the effect is determined by the effect determining means, an image prompting the operation of the effect operating means is displayed on the display means, and the operation of the effect operating means is detected by the effect detecting means, or the operation of the effect operating means is detected. When a predetermined execution condition different from the operation of the effect operation means is satisfied, the display of the image prompting the operation of the effect operation means by the display means is terminated, and the effect execution means operates the effect operation means. When the predetermined execution condition is satisfied in a state where the effect triggered by the effect is determined by the effect determining means, the effect triggered by the operation of the effect operating means is executed.

With this configuration, when the gaming machine according to the present invention executes an effect triggered by the operation of the effect operation means, even if the effect operation means is not operated, if a predetermined execution condition is satisfied. , Since the production triggered by the operation of the production operation means is executed, the player's interest can be improved by the production.

The game machine according to the present invention further includes game medium detection means (medal sensor 46 and BET switch 62) for detecting the input of the game medium, and the predetermined execution condition is the game medium detected by the game medium detection means. It may be further included that the input of is detected.

With this configuration, when the gaming machine according to the present invention executes an effect triggered by the operation of the effect operating means, even if the effect operating means is not operated, the game is played for the next unit game. Since the effect triggered by the operation of the effect operation means is executed when the medium is input, the effect triggered by the operation of the effect operation means can be executed almost reliably.

In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-146588, since the operation order of the stop operation may greatly affect the profit obtained by the player, the visual recognition of the image notifying the operation order of the stop operation If the sex is not guaranteed, there is a risk of giving a disadvantage to the player.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a video output means (projector mechanism B2) for outputting video, and a plurality of display devices (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1 and) capable of displaying the video output by the video output means. A reel screen mechanism F1), a plurality of reels (3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. , The start operation detecting means (start switch 64) for detecting the start operation of the game, and the symbol changing means (the symbol changing means) for changing the symbol by rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation of the game by the start operation detecting means. Stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R), an internal winning combination determining means (main CPU 93) that determines an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined winning probability based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition, and the plurality of combinations. Based on the stop operation detecting means (stop switch 17S) provided corresponding to the reels and detecting the stop operation for stopping each reel, and the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. A stop notification means (main CPU 93 and sub CPU 102) for notifying the operation order of the stop operation is provided, and at least one display device (reel screen mechanism F1) among the plurality of display devices is configured to be movable. The stop notification means displays an operation order notification image showing the operation order of the stop operation in the display area of any one of the plurality of display devices, and moves the display device to the movable position of the movable display device. Correspondingly, the operation order notification video is switched to the video output means so that the area for displaying the operation order notification video moves.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention has an operation sequence indicating the operation sequence of the stop operation so that the area for displaying the operation sequence notification image moves according to the movable position of the display device configured to be movable. By switching the notification video to the video output means, the visibility of the operation sequence notification video is ensured, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the plurality of display devices are configured to be movable with a first display device (fixed screen mechanism D) in which the operation order notification image is displayed by the stop notification means. The first display device includes a second display device (reel screen mechanism F1), the first display device has a plurality of display areas including a first display area and a second display area, and the second display device is the second display device. 1 It is movable to an exposed position that is exposed so as to cover the display device, and the stop notification means responds to the first display area of the first display device when the second display device is not in the exposed position. The operation sequence notification image is displayed in the first display area of the first display device, and when the second display device is in the exposed position, the operation corresponding to the second display area of the first display area. The operation sequence notification image may be displayed in the second display area of the first display device.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a first display area of the first display device when the second display device movable to the exposed position so as to cover the first display device is not in the exposed position. The operation sequence notification image according to the above is displayed in the first display area of the first display device, and when the second display device is in the exposed position, the operation order notification image corresponding to the second display area of the first display device is displayed. Is displayed in the second display area of the first display device, so that the visibility of the operation sequence notification image is ensured, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first display device includes a front surface (reflection surface of the front reflection unit D1), a left surface (reflection surface of the left surface reflection unit D3) and a right surface (reflection surface of the left surface reflection unit D3) arranged on the left and right sides of the front surface. The first display device has a lower surface (reflection surface of the right surface reflection portion D2) and a lower surface (reflection surface of the lower surface reflection portion D4) sandwiched between the left surface and the right surface on the lower side of the front surface. The display area may be included in the front surface, and the second display area of the first display area may be included in the lower surface surface.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention is included in the front of the first display device when the second display device movable to the exposed position so as to cover the first display device is not in the exposed position. By displaying the operation order notification image in the first display area and displaying the operation order notification image in the second display area included in the lower surface of the first display device when the second display device is in the exposed position, the operation order notification image is displayed. Since the visibility of the operation order notification video is ensured, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-131586, when a special role is won, the game may not be advantageous to the player, which may reduce the interest of the player.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels (3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And the start operation detecting means (start switch 64) for detecting the start operation of the game, and the symbol changing means for changing the symbol by rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation of the game by the start operation detecting means. (Stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R), an internal winning combination determining means (main CPU 93) that determines an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined winning probability based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition, and the above. A stop operation detecting means (stop switch 17S) provided corresponding to a plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the stop operation. Reel stop control means (main CPU 93 and stepping motor 51L) that stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the detection means. , 51C, 51R) and the symbol stopped on the effective line of the symbol display means due to the reel stop control means stopping the fluctuation of the symbol, and the winning or non-winning of the winning combination is determined. When a specific internal winning combination is determined by the determination means (main CPU 93) and the internal winning combination determining means, the specific advantage of shifting the gaming state to a specific advantageous state (for example, CT) that is advantageous to the player. A state transition means (main CPU 93) and a stop notification means (main CPU 93 and sub CPU 102) for notifying the operation order of the stop operation based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means are provided. The stop notification means is a unit game performed during the specific advantageous state, and the predetermined internal winning combination (for example, "triple reel") is determined by the internal winning combination determining means. When the internal winning combination of the above has an added value (for example, an addition of the duration of the normal ART), the operation sequence of the stop operation for stopping the combination of symbols based on the predetermined internal winning combination on the effective line. Is notified, and when the predetermined internal winning combination has no added value, the operation of the stop operation for stopping a combination of symbols different from the combination of symbols based on the predetermined internal winning combination on the effective line. order Has a configuration for notifying.

With this configuration, when the game machine according to the present invention is internally won by the predetermined internal winning combination, if the predetermined internal winning combination has added value, a combination of symbols based on the predetermined internal winning combination can be obtained. Notifies the operation order of the stop operation to stop on the effective line, and if the predetermined internal winning combination has no added value, a combination of symbols based on the predetermined internal winning combination and a combination of symbols different from the combination of symbols are displayed on the effective line. By notifying the operation order of the stop operation to stop the player, even if the combination of symbols based on the predetermined internal winning combination is stopped on the effective line, the situation where the player cannot obtain added value is avoided. ..

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present invention makes the player entertaining because the player cannot obtain added value even if the combination of symbols based on the predetermined internal winning combination stops on the effective line. It is possible to prevent it from being lowered.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a video output means (projector mechanism B2) for outputting a production image and a display device (fixed screen mechanism D, front) capable of displaying the production image output by the video output means. The screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1) may be further provided, and the stop notification means may notify the operation order of the stop operation by the effect video.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention can variously notify the operation order of the stop operation.

In a game machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-042693, there is a slight deviation between the movable position of the movable accessory recognized by the control program and the actual movable position of the movable accessory. If it occurs, the deviation may cause further deviation, which may cause inconsistency in the production using the movable accessory, which may cause discomfort to the player.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a movable accessory (for example, a front screen mechanism E1) that is movable between a first position (for example, a front standby position) and a second position (for example, a front exposed position), and the movable object. Drive control that manages the movable position of the movable accessory by updating the number of steps based on the accessory driving means (for example, the drive motor E25) for driving the accessory and the movable reference unit of the accessory driving means. The means (sub CPU 102) and a first position sensor (for example, front standby position sensor E15a) for detecting that the movable accessory is in the first position (step count “0”) are provided. When the first position sensor changes from the non-detection state to the detection state, the drive control means corrects the number of steps to the first value (step count "19"), and the first position sensor is in the detection state. It has a configuration in which the number of steps is corrected to a second value (step count "23") when the state changes from the above to the non-detection state.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention sets the number of steps to the first when the first position sensor for detecting that the movable accessory is in the first position changes from the non-detection state to the detection state. By correcting to a value and changing from the detected state to the non-detected state, by correcting the number of steps to the second value, when the first position sensor changes from the non-detected state to the detected state, and from the detected state The error in the number of steps from when the state changes to the non-detection state is eliminated.

Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, inconsistency occurs in the production using the movable accessory due to the deviation between the movable position of the movable accessory managed by the drive control means and the actual movable position of the movable accessory. Since it can be prevented from being stowed, it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention further includes a second position sensor (for example, a front exposure position sensor E15b) for detecting that the movable accessory is in the second position (step count "210"). When the second position sensor changes from the non-detection state to the detection state, the drive control means corrects the number of steps to a third value (step count "192"), and the second position sensor causes the second position sensor. When the detection state is changed to the non-detection state, the number of steps may be corrected to a fourth value (step count “188”).

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention sets the number of steps to a third when the second position sensor for detecting that the movable accessory is in the second position changes from the non-detection state to the detection state. By correcting to a value and changing from the detected state to the non-detected state, by correcting the number of steps to the fourth value, when the second position sensor changes from the non-detected state to the detected state, and from the detected state The error in the number of steps from when the state changes to the non-detection state is eliminated.

Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, inconsistency occurs in the production using the movable accessory due to the deviation between the movable position of the movable accessory managed by the drive control means and the actual movable position of the movable accessory. It is possible to prevent it from happening more reliably.

1 Pachislot machine (game machine)
3L, 3C, 3R reel 4 Display window (design display means)
17S stop switch (stop operation detection means)
20 Protective cover 22a, 22b Decorative part 23a, 23b Decorative LED (light source)
33 Chance button (directing operation means)
34 Chance button LED (directing operation light source)
35 Chance switch (effect operation detection means)
46 Medal sensor (game medium detection means)
51L, 51C, 51R stepping motors (design change means, reel stop control means)
62 BET switch (game medium detection means)
64 Start switch (start operation detection means)
74 24h Door open / close monitoring unit (error detection means)
76 ROM cartridge board (error image storage means)
93 Main CPU (internal winning combination determination means, reel stop control means, winning determination means, specific advantageous state transition means, notification means, stop notification means)
100 display unit (display means)
102 Sub CPU (drive control means, effect execution means, accessory position determination means, accessory position determination means, accessory position error detection means, display control means, game information recording means, light source control means, display device identification means, effect Determining means, effect operation display means, effect image display means, notification means, stop notification means, error display means, focal length control means)
201a Image display device (secondary display device)
201b Touch sensor (contact input device)
B2 projector mechanism (video output means, video projection device)
D Fixed screen mechanism (display device)
E1 front screen mechanism (movable accessory, display device)
F1 reel screen mechanism (movable accessory, display device)
E25 drive motor (first accessory drive means, accessory drive means)
F21 drive motor (second accessory drive means, accessory drive means)

Claims (1)

Display means for displaying production images and
The production operation means used for production and
A production decision means that determines the production according to the progress of the game,
An effect executing means for executing the effect determined by the effect determining means,
An effect video display means for causing the display means to display an image corresponding to the effect determined by the effect determination means.
The effect operation detecting means for detecting the operation of the effect operation means is provided.
The effect video display means
When the effect triggered by the operation of the effect operation means is determined by the effect determination means, the display means is displayed with an image prompting the operation of the effect operation means.
When the operation of the effect operation means is detected by the effect operation detection means, or when a predetermined execution condition different from the operation of the effect operation means is satisfied, the operation of the effect operation means by the display means. End the display of the video that prompts
The effect executing means triggers the operation of the effect operating means when the predetermined execution condition is satisfied in a state where the effect triggered by the operation of the effect operating means is determined by the effect determining means. run the director to be,
The effects triggered by the operation of the effect operating means include the first effect indicating that the first privilege has been granted in the predetermined game state, and a game state different from the predetermined game state or the predetermined game state. A gaming machine characterized by including a second effect indicating that a second privilege different from the first privilege has been granted .

Images